Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
What’s inside...
New in this release and documentation roadmap
Alarm monitoring
5400 Switch alarm and trouble clearing procedures
Service-affecting/non service-affecting alarms
For additional office locations and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at www.ciena.com.
Publication history 0
April 2018
Standard Revision A.
This is the first standard release of this document for software release 4.4.
Contents 0
Publication history i
About this document ix
New in this release and documentation roadmap xi
HIBER 2-158
High temperature 2-159
In loopback condition 2-163
In loopback mode 2-164
Input power fuse 2-165
Intrusion detection 2-167
Last authentication key expired 2-168
LAPS automatic switch to protect 2-170
LAPS channel mismatch 2-175
LAPS far end protection line failure 2-177
LAPS forced switch to protect 2-178
LAPS forced switch to working 2-180
LAPS invalid APS mode 2-182
LAPS lockout of protection 2-184
LAPS lockout of working 2-185
LAPS manual switch to protect 2-186
LAPS manual switch to working 2-188
LAPS mode mismatch 2-190
LAPS protection switch byte failure 2-192
Laser frequency out of range 2-194
LCH 2-195
Line Flapping 2-197
LOC 2-199
LOF 2-201
LOP 2-206
Loss of multi-frame indication 2-208
Loss of lane alignment 2-209
Loss of PCS 2-210
LOS 2-212
LSC 2-217
Maximum discovered route limit reached 2-222
NDP configuration mismatch condition 2-223
NDP adjacency down 2-224
NDP duplicate subtended neighbor condition 2-226
Network configuration changes inhibited 2-227
Nodes per area exceeded 2-228
NTP server connection failed 2-230
ODU AIS 2-235
ODU BDI 2-237
ODU DEG 2-239
ODU LCK 2-244
ODU LOF 2-245
ODU OCI 2-250
ODU PLM 2-252
ODU TIM 2-254
Operation out of spec 2-256
OPR channel out of range 2-258
OPR channel power high 2-260
OPR out-of-range 2-261
OPR power high 2-262
Trademark Acknowledgments
• Ciena® is a registered trademark of Ciena Corporation.
• Cisco® is a registered trademark of Cisco.
• Juniper Networks, the Juniper Networks logo, JUNOS, Steel-Belted
Radius, NetScreen, and ScreenOS are registered trademarks of Juniper
Networks, Inc. in the United States and other countries. JUNOSe is a
trademark of Juniper Networks, Inc.
• UNIX® is a registered trademark licensed exclusively through X/Open
Company, Ltd.
Intended Audience
This document is intended for certified system installation technicians, test
engineers, network operations center, and technical support personnel
responsible for configuration. All personnel are required to read, understand,
and observe the safety precautions described in the appropriate product
manuals.
The latest online version of this document and all release notes can be
accessed on the Ciena web site at http://www.ciena.com.
Related Documentation
Additional supporting documentation is available through the Ciena web site
at http://www.ciena.com.
The following list contains the names of the related documents in the suite:
• System Description (009-3288-100)
• 5430 Hardware Installation (009-3288-201.1)
• 5410 Hardware Installation (009-3288-201.2)
• 5430 15Tb Upgrade (009-3288-201.3)
• 5430 PDU Upgrade (009-3288-201.4)
• 5410 5Tb Upgrade (009-3288-201.5)
• Commissioning and Testing (009-3288-221)
• TL-1 Description (009-3288-190)
• Node Manager Fundamentals (009-3288-195)
• Administration and Security (009-3288-301)
• Configuration - Provisioning and Operating (009-3288-310)
• Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services (009-3288-320)
• Configuration - Control Plane (009-3288-330)
• Fault Management - Performance Monitoring (009-3288-520)
• Fault Management - Alarm Clearing (009-3288-543)
• Fault Management - Module Replacement (009-3288-545)
• SAOS Command Reference (009-3288-610)
• SAOS Configuration (009-3288-630)
• SAOS Event Reference (009-3288-650)
• SAOS MPLS Configuration (009-3288-670)
• SAOS MIB Reference (009-3288-690)
Document Comments
Ciena appreciates all comments that help us to improve our documentation
quality. The user can submit comments through the Ciena web site at http://
www.ciena.com.
Documentation Roadmap
The following roadmap illustrates the structure of the 5400 technical
publications library.
Alarm monitoring 1-
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be met in order to successfully operate the
5400 Switch using procedures contained in this manual.
• The 5400 Switch must be installed in accordance with the 5400 Switch
hardware installation manual.
• The 5400 Switch system must be turned up and tested in accordance with
the 5400 Switch Turn-up and Test Manual.
• Node Manager must be installed and running on either a laptop or site
terminal. The revision level of the Node Manager software must be
compatible with the 5400 Switch.
• A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) application (for example, WFTPD software
by Texas Imperial Software or another FTP package) must be made
available to support software upgrades that may be required.
• The user must be Ciena-certified.
• The user must have the appropriate 5400 Switch Node Manager user
privileges to perform certain tasks.
• The user must have a knowledge of:
– The operating system on which Node Manager resides (for
example, Windows® XP, Windows® NT, and Windows® 7, or UNIX
operating systems)
Overview
The 5400 Reconfigurable Switching System conducts fault monitoring
applications and detects, isolates, and corrects abnormal operations. These
fault monitoring features inform external management software applications
(OneControl Unified Management System and 5400 Node Manager). This
chapter describes basic alarm monitoring using:
Table 1-1
Alarm categories
Alarm Description
Communications alarm An alarm associated with the procedures and/or processes required to
carry information from one point to another.
Quality of Service (QOS) An alarm caused by the degradation in the quality of the service
alarm provided.
Local troubleshooting uses 5400 Node Manager and 5400 Switch controls
and indicators. If it is determined that a fault is caused by 5400 Switch circuit
packs or common equipment, a on-site technician can continue physical
troubleshooting. Upon arrival on-site, the technician makes an assessment of
the condition of the 5400 Switch by performing a visual inspection of the LEDs
on the display panel on the top of the rack/chassis.
While the NOC operator troubleshoots remotely, the craft technician performs
a visual inspection of the system and uses 5400 Switch Node Manager
software to diagnose the malfunction. Diagnostics and troubleshooting may
also require specialized test equipment (for example, power meter, back
reflection meter, optical spectrum analyzer, or optical time domain
reflectometer).
After diagnosing the problem, the craft technician refers to the appropriate
maintenance procedure.
ATTENTION
Clear alarms in order of severity. Clear all Critical alarms first, then clear all
Major alarms, and then clear all minor alarms.
ATTENTION
“Service-affecting/non service-affecting alarms” on page 3-1, provides
additional information.
This chapter provides trouble clearing procedures for all alarms and warnings
monitored by the 5400 Switch. The alarms and warnings are in alphabetic
order.
Alarm
AIS-L/MS-AIS (TTP)
AIS-P/RDI-P (CTP)
Table 2-1
5400 Switch Alarms (continued)
Alarm
AU-AIS
Autonegotiation fail
Channel contention
Configuration mismatch
DC power failed
Table 2-1
5400 Switch Alarms (continued)
Alarm
DPanel mismatch
Ethernet-LOF
Ethernet-LOS
Ethernet-RFI
Fan overdriven
Firmware mismatch
Table 2-1
5400 Switch Alarms (continued)
Alarm
Generic AIS
HIBER
High temperature
In loopback condition
In loopback mode
Intrusion detection
LCH
Line Flapping
LOC
LOF
Table 2-1
5400 Switch Alarms (continued)
Alarm
LOP
Loss of PCS
LOS
LSC
ODU AIS
ODU BDI
ODU DEG
ODU LCK
ODU LOF
ODU OCI
ODU PLM
ODU TIM
OPR out-of-range
Table 2-1
5400 Switch Alarms (continued)
Alarm
OPU CSF
OTU AIS
OTU BDI
OTU DEG
OTU LOF
OTU LOL
OTU PFSD
OTU PFSF
Table 2-1
5400 Switch Alarms (continued)
Alarm
OTU TIM
Out-of-range
PDI-P
PDU mismatch
PLM-P
PPPCommunicationConflict
PPPCommunicationFailure
Provisioning mismatch
Provisioning required
RDI/MS-RDI
Reference failed
SDCC/LDCC
SD/SF
SD-P/SF-P
Table 2-1
5400 Switch Alarms (continued)
Alarm
Superuser logged in
TC-AIS
TC-LTC
TC-RDI
TCM AIS
TCM BDI
TCM DEG
TCM LCK
TCM LOF
TCM LTC
TCM OCI
TCM TIM
TIM-P
Table 2-1
5400 Switch Alarms (continued)
Alarm
Trace mismatch
Transmit mismatch
Unavailable (SNC)
UNEQ/UNEQ-P
ATTENTION
Maintenance procedures are located in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault
Management - Module Replacement.
Procedure 2-1
Ciena return material authorization (RMA) procedure
Overview
This procedure describes how to obtain a Ciena Return Material Authorization
(RMA) number and how to return a defective item to Ciena.
Required tools
• ESD-guard wrist strap
• ESD-guard wrist strap
• ESD-guard heel grounders
• Common hand tools
• Anti-static bag or anti-static box
Prerequisites
• Collect hardware related alarm additional text information.
• The user must use proper module handling procedures. When handling,
installing, or removing modules, the following precautions must be
observed.
— Ensure modules are stored in ESD-protective packaging when not
installed in an equipment shelf.
— Do not stack modules on or against each other.
— Pick up modules by the front handle, and do not touch components on
the circuit board.
• An anti-static bag or box must be available for the removed module.
Referenced documents
• None
Procedure
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs/modules
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
sensitive devices. Wear grounding straps when handling
equipment and follow ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
All returned equipment must have a Ciena RMA number. Ciena is not
responsible for any item returned without this identifier.
Step Action
ATTENTION
Ciena assigns an RMA number, which is used to track the defective item. The
replacement item will be shipped to the customer, based upon the terms of
the Customer Contract for Warranty (repair or replace).
2 After the replacement item has been unpacked and installed, reuse the
shipping container,packing materials, and optical dust caps to return the
defective item to Ciena.
3 Affix the preprinted air bill to the shipping container.
4 Arrange for the shipper to collect the shipping container.
—end—
Procedure 2-2
Using the ACO switch to turn off an alarm
Overview
This procedure describes how to turn off an audible alarm using the Alarm
Cut-Off (ACO) switch on the 5430 Switch display module or 5410 CTM. The
ACO switch enables a craftsperson to silence an audible alarm at the node.
The ACO switch does not inhibit any other visible indication of the alarm.
Furthermore, all subsequent alarms (including audible alarms) continue to be
monitored and processed.
Required tools
• ESD-guard wrist strap
• ESD-guard heel grounders
Prerequisites
• The facility containing the 5400 Switch must be equipped with an audible
alarm that is connected to the 5400 Switch.
Referenced documents
• None
Procedure
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs/modules
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
sensitive devices. Wear grounding straps when handling
equipment and follow ESD procedures.
Step Action
1 At the 5430 Switch display module or 5410 Switch CTM, press and
momentarily hold ACO (alarm cut off) to trigger LED test. All led will transition
between their colors for about a minute. No report is generated. No alarms
are raised. LED inspection is visual only.
2 Press the ACO/LED button and the blue light indicates to immediately silence
audible alarms. When all minor, major and critical alarms are cleared then the
blue light will clear.
—end—
Procedure 2-3
Clearing TCM CTP PM Invalid Flag
Overview
The Node Manager TCM CTP Real Time Stats screen has an Invalid Data
flag. The Invalid Data flag turns red indicating the value of the counter is not
valid for the entire interval.
• During mesh restorations, the terminating node SNC and TCM CTP are
deleted. On the originating node, the TCM CTP does not get deleted and
TCM CTP stays valid. The originating node TCM CTP's far end and
terminating Node's Near/Far end are marked as invalid due to deletion/
creation of TCM object on the Terminating node.
• When collected PM data counters are reset to initial value of zero for a
current accumulation period the data for that period is declared invalid and
the invalid data flag is red.
• When the data collection begins after the start of a collection period, the
data for that collection period is declared invalid and the invalid data flag
is red.
Category: Standing condition
Default severity: There is no alarm indication however, the Invalid Data flag
turns from grey to red when data is invalid.
Procedure
Step Action
1 If the Invalid Data flag is set at the near end, check for and clear the following:
• TCM is in SSF
• TCM is in Dependency
• TIM is present with action enabled
Note: During mesh restorations, the Invalid Data flag is set if any of the above
conditions are present.
2 If the Invalid Data flag is set at the far end, check for and clear the following:
• TCM defect present (AIS,LCK,LTC,OCI,TIM with action enabled)
• TCM is in SSF
• TCM is in dependency
• ODUk CTP does not have an associated active cross connect
Note: During mesh restorations, the Invalid Data flag is set due to deletion
and recreation of far end cross connect.
—end—
Procedure 2-4
CTM Control Plane Restart
Overview
This procedure describes how to control plane restart the primary or
secondary CTM. The CTM control plane restart restarts the upper-layer
software only (core_xx, cesd-xxxx, etc.). The timing plane and traffic are
unaffected.
Required tools
The following are required for all installations:
• Personal Computer (PC) or laptop computer running Windows®
• HyperTerminal available on PC
• File Transfer Protocol (FTP) software
• FTP server PC for storing database backup files
The following are required when the procedure is performed at the NE:
• ESD-guard wrist strap
• ESD-guard heel grounders
• Serial cable for connection to the CTM. The RJ-45 to sub-D 9 pin cable is
configured for Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) or USB to serial adapter.
Prerequisites
• Disable firewalls on the FTP server or the file transfer will not work.
• Craft Interface personnel must be registered system users with valid user
names and passwords to log on to the Command Line Interface (CLI).
• Craft Interface personnel must have knowledge in the use, setup, and
configuration of HyperTerminal software.
• Craft Interface personnel must have knowledge in the use, setup, and
configuration of FTP software on the FTP server.
• Setup the FTP server with the default user name and password
(anonymous).
Referenced documents
• None.
Procedure
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs/modules
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
sensitive devices. Wear grounding straps when handling
equipment and follow ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
If the upgrade is performed from the OneControl workstation, refer to the
OneControl software documentation and perform the OneControl Software
Backup on Demand (Manual) procedure.
Step Action
Step Action
Figure 2-1
Maintenance menu
---------------------------------------------------------
---- CIENA 5400 ----
---- MAINTENANCE MENU ----
---------------------------------------------------------
---- 1 Display system configuration
---- 2 Display module status
---- 3 Upgrade or revert software release
---- 4 Backup database
---- 5 Restore database
---- 6 Perform system operations
---- 7 Modify system configuration
---- 10 Log off
---------------------------------------------------------
1-A-CTM:P> (rel_cn5430_3.0.1.0_cl634166, 5430-SVT-a64)
Enter Choice (? for help): ?
Step Action
Figure 2-2
Operations menu
-------------------------------------------------------------
---- CIENA 5400 ----
---- OPERATIONS MENU ----
-------------------------------------------------------------
---- 1 List Module status
---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
---- 2 Control Plane Restart a CTM
---- 3 Control Plane Restart an LM
---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
---- 4 Control Plane Reset the Primary CTM
---- 5 Control Plane Reset the Secondary CTM
---- 6 Control Plane Reset an LM
---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
---- 8 Full Reset the Primary CTM
---- 9 Full Reset the Secondary CTM
---- 10 Full Reset an LM
---- 11 Full Reset a SM
---- 12 Full Reset a CFU
---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
---- 14 Interrupt Backup or Restore Operations
---- 15 Service and Port Lock Config Menu
---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
---- 16 Telnet TLS Server Certificate Menu
---- 17 HTTPS Client Certificate Menu
---- 18 Security Log TLS Server Certificate Menu
---- 19 Security Log TLS Server Key Menu
---- 20 LDAP Client Certificate Menu
---- 21 LDAP CA Certificate Menu
---- 22 LDAP Client Key Menu
---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
---- 23 Support Menu
---- 24 Return to CTM CLI Menu
------------------------------------------------------------
1-A-CTM:P> (rel_cn5430_3.0.1.0_cl634166, 5430-SVT-a64)
Enter Choice (? for help): ?
5 At the Operations menu type the option number to Control Plane Restart a
CTM and press Enter.
Enter CTM to control plane restart: is displayed.
6 Type 1-A-CTM or 1-C-CTM (5430 Switch) or 1-A-CTM1or 1-A-CTM2 (5410
Switch).
—end—
Procedure 2-5
LM Control Plane Restart
Overview
This procedure describes how to control plane restart the a LM. The LM
control plane restart restarts the upper-layer software only (core_xx, cesd-
xxxx, etc.). The data plane and traffic are unaffected.
Required tools
The following are required for all installations:
• Personal Computer (PC) or laptop computer running Windows®
• HyperTerminal available on PC
• File Transfer Protocol (FTP) software
• FTP server PC for storing database backup files
The following are required when the procedure is performed at the NE:
• ESD-guard wrist strap
• ESD-guard heel grounders
• Serial cable for connection to the CTM. The RJ-45 to sub-D 9 pin cable is
configured for Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) or USB to serial adapter.
Prerequisites
• Disable firewalls on the FTP server or the file transfer will not work.
• Craft Interface personnel must be registered system users with valid user
names and passwords to log on to the Command Line Interface (CLI).
• Craft Interface personnel must have knowledge in the use, setup, and
configuration of HyperTerminal software.
• Craft Interface personnel must have knowledge in the use, setup, and
configuration of FTP software on the FTP server.
• Setup the FTP server with the default user name and password
(anonymous).
Referenced documents
• None.
Procedure
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs/modules
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
sensitive devices. Wear grounding straps when handling
equipment and follow ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
If the upgrade is performed from the OneControl workstation, refer to the
OneControl software documentation and perform the OneControl Software
Backup on Demand (Manual) procedure.
Step Action
Procedure 2-6
A-SNCP automatic switch
Category: Standing condition
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab.
3 Note the port that displays the A-SNCP automatic switch condition.
4 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed port is displayed and verify that no
equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
trouble clearing procedure for the alarmed equipment.
—continued—
Step Action
5 Check the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream LTE or
MSTE is another 5400 Switch or CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a
network drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The
far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser should be checked for the following:
• Port and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace the port, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace port SFP/XFP/CFP or equivalent with correct
rate, wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a
transmit 5400 Switch port, expand the Node Manager configuration tree,
select the Physical TP and Basic tabs, and ensure that the provisioned
optical rate is correct. Always lock the port before correcting and unlock
when completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port or
equivalent.)
• The output level of the laser (Node Manager PRTP Physical tab) should
be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform System Description. (Corrective action: clean the
transmit port or equivalent fiber connector, replace the port or equivalent,
and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400 Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical multiplexer tests bad,
repair in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to
step 26.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical multiplexer tests
good, go to step 6.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
6 Remove the alarmed port receive fiber. If required, refer to 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing. Insert the receive fiber into a
test set capable of reading bit errors and light level.
7 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 8.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 19.
8 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices and reinsert receive fiber into test set.
9 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 10.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 23.
10 The received light level should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description. Verify
that the received light level is within specification.
11 If the received light level is within specification, go to step 17.
• If the received light level is not within specification, go to step 12.
—continued—
Step Action
12 Determine if there one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit LTE or MSTE checked in step 5 and the receive LTE or
MSTE in alarm).
• If no WDM line systems are in the upstream path, go to step 13.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 15.
13 The output of the far end upstream LTE or MSTE was previously tested in
step 5. The low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty
or defective fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit LTE or
MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or MSTE. Isolate and clean/repair the
fiber or connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
14 Determine if a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired in
step 13.
• If a defective/dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired in step 13,
go to step 15.
• If no defective/dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired in step
13, go to step 28.
15 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 5 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch port in alarm. Correct any problems that are found.
16 Determine if any problems were isolated and corrected in step 15.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected in step 15, go to step 17.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected in step 15, go to step 28.
17 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit LTE or MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or
MSTE in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
18 Determine if any problems were isolated and corrected in step 17.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected in step 17, go to step 19.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected in step 17, go to step 28.
—continued—
Step Action
19 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
and Equipment Safety Practices.
20 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
21 Click Go > Configuring > Ptp and select the Basic tab.
22 View the Configured Rate box and ensure that the correct optical rate is
selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 23.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
23 Reconnect the fiber, then reinstall the port in accordance with the procedure
titled “Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP” in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
24 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 25.
25 Replace the port with a shelf spare. If required, refer to the procedure titled
“Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP” in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement. Then go to step 28.
26 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 28.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to step 27.
27 Reconnect the receive fiber, then reinstall the port. If required, refer to the
procedure titled “Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP” in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
28 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-7
A-SNCP fail to revert
Category: Reporting event
Condition Description: The ASNCP failed to revert within the TODR window.
The System shall raise the A-SNCP Fail To Revert event when an A-SNCP
fails to revert within the TODR window.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the module that displays the A-SNCP fail to revert alarm.
3 Verify no automatic switches are active.
• If automatic switches are active or the original alarm has not cleared, then
go to step 4
• If alarm has cleared, then go to step 6
4 Determine if a user switch (manual, forced or lockout) is active. release the
switch.
• If no switches are active or the alarm has cleared, then go to step 5
• If alarm has cleared, then go to step 6
5 If the alarm remains active, ensure that no other alarm is active
6 Verify that the warning cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-8
A-SNCP fail to switch
Category: Communication
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab.
3 Note and clear any path faults protection switch byte failure and far end
protect line fail alarms.
4 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-9
A-SNCP forced switch to protect
Category: Service report
The ASNCP Forced Switch to Protect condition is raised when a forced switch
to the protect path is initiated. The condition is cleared when a higher priority
switch is initiated or when the forced switch is released.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the module that displays the A-SNCP forced switch to protect warning.
3 From the list under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Groups tab,
select the protection unit identified in step 2.
4 Verify the state of the working path in the Administer/Status field is OKAY.
5 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
6 Click Yes in confirmation dialog.
7 If there are several locked protection units in the ASNCP group, from the list
under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the
ASNCP group.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-10
A-SNCP forced switch to working
Category: Service report
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the module that displays the A-SNCP forced switch to working warning.
3 Click Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP and select the Protection Units
tab, select the ASNCP protection unit identified in step 2 from the list in the
list frame.
4 Click the Release button in the Administer/Status field.
5 Click Yes in confirmation dialog.
6 If there are several protection units switched, under the Go > Protection >
Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the ASNCP group identified in step
2 from the list in the list frame.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-11
A-SNCP lockout of protect
Category: Service report
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the module that displays the A-SNCP lockout of protect warning.
3 From the list under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Protection
Unit tab, select the protection unit identified in step 2.
4 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
5 If there are several locked protection units in the ASNCP group, from the list
under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the
ASNCP group.
6 Click the Release button in Administer All PUs field.
7 Verify that the warning cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-12
A-SNCP manual switch to protect
Category: Service report
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the port that displays the A-SNCP manual switch to protect condition.
3 Under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Protection Unit tab,
select the protection unit identified in step 2 from the list.
4 Click the Release button in Administer/Status field.
5 If there are several switched protection units in the ASNCP group, under the
Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the ASNCP
group from the list.
6 Click the Release button in Administer all PUs field.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-13
A-SNCP manual switch to working
Category: Service report
This warning is raised when a manual switch to the working path is initiated
and the ASNCP protection is provisioned as revertive. The condition is cleared
when a higher priority switch is initiated or when the manual switch is
released.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the module that displays the A-SNCP manual switch to working warning.
3 From the list under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Protection
Unit tab, select the protection unit identified in step 2.
4 Verify the state of the protect path in the Administer/Status field is OKAY.
5 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
6 Click YES in the confirmation dialog.
7 If there are several locked protection units in the ASNCP group, from the list
under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the
ASNCP group.
8 Click the Release button in Administer all PUs field.
—continued—
Step Action
9 Click Accept.
10 Verify that the warning cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-14
Adjacency discovery unreliable
Category: Communication
NM Additional Text:
This alarm is raised when a remote shelf that the SPLI feature is tracking has
not communicated (UDP) with the SPLI application for more than 10 minutes.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the module that displays the Adjacency discovery unreliable alarm.
3 From the NM SPLI tab, determine if any shelves are unreliable.
4 Verify whether the TID or siteID has changed on those nodes. If changes
have been made, change the TID or siteID of those nodes back to the original
ones if necessary.
5 If changes have not been made, verify that communications are working
correctly by logging into the node.
—continued—
Step Action
6 Click the Refresh button in the SPLI tab of the node Information window to
retrieve the latest status.
7 If SPLI is not matching all the TID-shelves that are listed as unreliable, click
the Delete button. This will remove all the unreliable entries from the table.
8 Verify that the warning cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-15
AIS-L/MS-AIS (TTP)
Category: Communication
NM Additional Text:
• SONET- Line AIS
• SDH- Multiplex section AIS
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the port that displays the AIS-L/MS-AIS (TTP) alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
3 Expand the node equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify
that no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
trouble clearing procedure for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
4 For all upstream WDM technologies between the node LTE reporting the AIS-
L alarm and the upstream LTE, check for any equipment alarms and line
facility defect alarms in the line facility path.
• If all WDM technologies in the upstream line facility path test good, go to
step 5.
• If any WDM technologies in the upstream line facility path are reporting
equipment alarms or line signal defects, resolve or refer in accordance
with internal guidelines. When all WDM technology alarms are resolved,
go to step 5.
ATTENTION
If an upstream WDM technology signal defect alarm is isolated back to the
transmit LTE, the LTE laser should be checked for the following:
• SFP/XFP/CFP and LM equipment failures or Laser Bias Current Threshold
Crossing Alerts (TCAs) should not be present. (Corrective action: replace SFP/
XFP/CFP or LM.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and the
provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct. (Corrective action:
replace/provision SFP/XFP/CFP with correct rate, wavelength, and reach. To
check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit node port, expand the Node Manager
Configuration tree, click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs and ensure that the
provisioned optical rate is correct by viewing the list frame Rate to ensure that the
correct optical rate is selected. Always lock the port before correcting, and unlock
the port when completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action; unlock the SFP/XFP/CFP.)
• Verify the output level of the laser (Corrective action: clean the transmit SFP/XFP/
CFP fiber connector and bulkhead connector, replace the SFP/XFP/CFP, or correct
improper Line Build Out (LBO) if not 5400 Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of the other
indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if other technology)
may be defective.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Remove the incoming fiber to the port and connect the fiber to an optical test
set.
• If test set reports incoming AIS-L or any other line signal defect, the
section trouble is external. The source of the downstream AIS must be
manually isolated to a reporting WDM system. Isolate or refer in
accordance with internal guidelines.
ATTENTION
If a signal defect is isolated to the upstream LTE, check the upstream LTE
laser as indicated in step 4. When the root cause of the AIS alarm is isolated
and resolved, go to step 6.
• If the test set does not report incoming AIS-L or any other line signal
defect, go to step 7.
6 Reconnect fiber, reinstall SFP/XFP/CFP, and recheck alarm status.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm still exists, go to step 7.
7 Replace the SFP/XFP/CFP in accordance with 5400 Packet-Optical Platform
Fault Management - Module Replacement.
8 Verify that the warning cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-16
AIS-P/RDI-P (CTP)
Category: Communication
NM Additional Text:
• Path AIS
• AU-AIS
Default Severity:
• Not reported (default)
• Dynamic - Minor/Non service affecting for ports with protected status, or
Major/service affecting for ports with unprotected status
TL1 String:
• AIS (SONET/SDH)
Alarm Indication Signal - Path (AIS-P) and Remote Defect Indicator - Path
(RDI-P) are maintenance signals that alert downstream equipment that a
defect (for example, LOS or LOF) has been detected in the incoming signal.
The node reports AIS-P or RDI-P for drop-side CTPs at the originating and
terminating nodes only. The drop-side CTP alarms are critical and service
affecting.
AIS-P and RDI-P are cleared when the CTP is administratively locked, the
path is deleted, or 10 seconds after the path AIS or RDI clears.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Select
the AIS-P/RDI-P (CTP) alarm and note the upstream drop CTP at the 5400
Switch network edge.
3 Determine if the CTP is reporting an AIS (CTP) alarm at the node at the
network edge drop of the overall SNC.
• If the CTP is reporting an AIS (CTP) alarm, the trouble is external to the
5400 Switch network. Isolate and resolve or refer the external AIS-P
trouble in accordance with internal guidelines, then go to step 6.
• If the CTP is not reporting an AIS (CTP) alarm, go to step 4.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
—continued—
Step Action
4 At the Node Manager workstation, view the Current Alarms Summary screen
for the presence of the AIS-P alarm reporting at the upstream 5400 Switch
network edge drop CTP.
• If an AIS-P alarm is being reported at the upstream incoming drop CTP,
the trouble is external to the 5400 Switch network. Isolate and resolve or
refer the external AIS-P trouble in accordance with internal guidelines,
then go to step 6.
• If this alarm is not being reported at the upstream incoming drop CTP, the
root cause of this trouble is internal to the 5400 Switch network. An
Unavailable (SNC) alarm should be reporting at the source node for this
SNC. Go to step 5.
5 View the alarms for all 5400 Switches in the upstream path. Note any of the
following alarms reporting to any 5400 Switch in the upstream facility path.
• Facility defect alarms (LOS, LOF, AIS-L/MS-AIS(TTP), SD/SF) on any
port associated with the SNC on any 5400 Switch in the upstream path.
• Equipment alarms on any SFP/XFP/CFP or LM associated with the SNC
reporting on any 5400 Switch in the upstream path.
• SM equipment or Port Data Plane Health alarms, power alarms, TGS
equipment alarms, or Ref Fail alarms reporting on any 5400 Switch in the
upstream path.
• If any of the indicated alarms are present on any 5400 Switch in the
upstream path, discontinue this procedure and perform the TCP for the
noted alarm.
• If none of the indicated alarms are present on any 5400 Switch in the
upstream path, go to step 6.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-17
All provisioned external authentication servers
unavailable
Category: Usage report
Object Class:
NM Probable Cause:
NM Additional Text:
The All External LDAP Servers Unavailable condition is reported when all
provisioned external LDAP servers cannot be reached based on the timeout
parameters.
The All External LDAP Servers Unavailable condition clears when External
LDAP is disabled or when any provisioned external authentication server can
be reached.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Select
the All provisioned external authentication servers unavailable alarm.
3 Disable the server from the 5400 switch.
4 Re-enable the server and log in or log out of the server.
5 If the alarm is raised again, disable the server and log in or log out of the
server.
—continued—
Step Action
6 If the alarm is raised, ensure the following server provisioning values on the
network element are correct:
• server IP address
• server port
7 Check the status of the server. Ensure the status is ON.
8 Log in or log out of the network element.
9 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-18
All redundant sync units failed
Category: Equipment
The All Redundant Synch Units Failed alarm is raised when both redundant
timing subsystems fail. In the event of an All Redundant Synch Units Failed
condition, a line level AIS is transmitted on all ports in the node and
Replaceable Unit Problem alarms (RUPs) are reported for both CTMs.
The System clears the alarm notification All Redundant Synch Units Failed
when one of the redundant timing subsystems is operational.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
ATTENTION
The All Redundant Synch Units Failed alarm means that both the A-CTM
and C-CTM timing subsystems have failed and that AIS-L is transmitted on
all ports. The following steps replace the secondary CTM and then replace
the primary CTM. The last steps of this procedure refer the user to perform
the All redundant sync units failed or procedures if required.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Under the Monitoring > Alarms & Events tab, view the alarm summary and
details screen. Note that the All redundant sync units failed alarm is present
and Replaceable Unit Problem Alarms are present for A-CTM and C-CTM.
3 Refer to the 5400 Switch and replace the secondary CTM in accordance with
the Remove and Install Control and Timing Module (CTM) procedure.
4 Under the Monitoring > Alarms & Events tab, view the alarm summary and
details screen. Note that the All Redundant Synch Units Failed alarm cleared
and the Replaceable Unit Problem Alarm for the replaced CTM cleared.
• If the All Redundant Synch Units Failed alarm has not cleared, contact
the next level of support.
5 If a Replaceable Unit Problem Alarm is present for the remaining CTM, refer
to the 5400 Switch and replace the remaining CTM in accordance with the
Remove and Install Control and Timing Module (CTM) procedure.
6 Under the Monitoring > Alarms & Events tab, view the alarm summary and
details screen. Note that the Replaceable Unit Problem Alarms for the
replaced CTM cleared.
7 Under the Monitoring > Alarms & Events tab, view the alarm summary and
details screen.
• If All redundant sync units failed alarm is present, go to All redundant
sync units failed.
• If Reference failed alarm is present, go to Reference failed.
8 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-19
All references failed
Category: Communications
The All References Failed condition is raised when a valid timing reference is
not available. This can be due to an input failure, SSM disqualification, locked
reference, or not defined reference. In this state, the system autonomously
enters holdover or free-run.The manually disabled state does not cause this
condition.
The All References Failed condition clears when one or more timing
references are qualified.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab.
3 Select the All references failed alarm and note the failure reason for each
BITS or SSU input.
4 For BITS 1 or SSU A, complete the Reference failed TCP and then go to step
5 of this procedure.
—continued—
Step Action
5 For BITS 2 or SSU B, complete the Reference failed TCP and then go to step
6 of this procedure.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-20
AU-AIS
Category: Communication
Default Severity:
• Dynamic - Minor/Non service affecting for ports with protected status, or
Major/service affecting for ports with unprotected status
TL1 String:
• AIS
Alarm Indication Signal - Path (AIS-P) and Remote Defect Indicator - Path
(RDI-P) are maintenance signals that alert downstream equipment that a
defect (for example, LOS or LOF) has been detected in the incoming signal.
The node reports AIS-P or RDI-P for drop-side CTPs at the originating and
terminating nodes only. The drop-side CTP alarms are critical and service
affecting.
AIS-P and RDI-P are cleared when the CTP is administratively locked, the
path is deleted, or 10 seconds after the path AIS or RDI clears.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab. Select the
AU-AIS alarm and note the upstream drop CTP at the 5400 Switch network
edge.
—continued—
Step Action
3 Determine if the CTP is reporting an AIS (CTP) alarm at the node at the
network edge drop of the overall SNC.
• If the CTP is reporting an AIS (CTP) alarm, the trouble is external to the
5400 Switch network. Isolate and resolve or refer the external AIS-P
trouble in accordance with internal guidelines, then go to step 6.
• If the CTP is not reporting an AIS (CTP) alarm, go to step 4.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
4 At the Node Manager workstation, view the Current Alarms Summary screen
for the presence of the AIS-P alarm reporting at the upstream 5400 Switch
network edge drop CTP.
• If an AIS-P alarm is being reported at the upstream incoming drop CTP,
the trouble is external to the 5400 Switch network. Isolate and resolve or
refer the external AIS-P trouble in accordance with internal guidelines,
then go to step 6.
• If this alarm is not being reported at the upstream incoming drop CTP, the
root cause of this trouble is internal to the 5400 Switch network. An
Unavailable (SNC) alarm should be reporting at the source node for this
SNC. Go to step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
5 View the alarms for all 5400 Switches in the upstream path. Note any of the
following alarms reporting to any 5400 Switch in the upstream facility path.
• Facility defect alarms (LOS, LOF, AIS-L/MS-AIS(TTP), SD/SF) on any
port associated with the SNC on any 5400 Switch in the upstream path.
• Equipment alarms on any SFP/XFP/CFP or LM associated with the SNC
reporting on any 5400 Switch in the upstream path.
• SM equipment or Port Data Plane Health alarms, power alarms, TGS
equipment alarms, or Ref Fail alarms reporting on any 5400 Switch in the
upstream path.
• If any of the indicated alarms are present on any 5400 Switch in the
upstream path, discontinue this procedure and perform the TCP for the
noted alarm.
• If none of the indicated alarms are present on any 5400 Switch in the
upstream path, go to step 6.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-21
Auto-revert window active
Category: Service Report
NM Probable Cause:
Condition Description: Period of time after a software upgrade for the 5400
Switch to stabilize. CTM, LM, SM reboots or HIR during this period causes the
5400 Switch to revert to the previous release.
The Auto-Revert Window Active condition clears when the 5400 Switch exits
the Auto-Revert Period after a software upgrade.
Procedure 2-22
Autonegotiation fail
Category: Communication
Probable Cause:
Condition Description:
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab.
3 Select the Autonegotiation fail alarm and note the name of the TETTP
reporting the alarm.
4 Click Go > TransETTP > Basic and verify that the Autonegotiation enable/
disable setting is provisioned with the same settings as the link partner of the
TETTP.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-23
Bay air filter(s) problem
Category: Equipment
Condition Description: This alarm is generated when the air filter needs to
be replaced.
A Bay Air Filter Problem is raised when the air filter timer expires and is
cleared by a user action to set the timer to a non-zero value.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Select
the Bay air filter(s) problem alarm, and note any additional equipment alarm
information related to the node.
• If there are any input power alarms, discontinue this procedure and
perform the appropriate Input Power TCP.
• If there are cooling fan unit replaceable unit problems, discontinue this
procedure and perform the replaceable unit problem TCP.
• If there are no related equipment alarms, go to step 3.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
3 At the node, replace the air filter in accordance with the Remove and Install
Air Filter procedure listed in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Administration and
Security.
4 At the Node Manager workstation, expand the inventory equipment tree if
necessary and select Bay.
5 In the Air Filter Service Timer text box, enter the number of days until the next
air filter service in accordance with local site practices.
6 Click Accept.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-24
Bay high ambient temperature
Category: Equipment
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Select
the Bay high ambient temperature alarm and note other alarms reporting at
the node and any additional alarm information. Check for related alarms in the
following order:
• If there are any input power alarms present, discontinue this procedure
and perform the appropriate input power trouble clearing procedure.
(Input power problems may affect the fans and ultimately bay cooling.)
• If there are any CFU replaceable unit problem alarms, discontinue this
procedure and perform the associated CFU replaceable unit problem
trouble clearing procedure.
ATTENTION
Do not discontinue this procedure in favor of Fan Overdriven alarms. The
fans always increase in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) if there are any
temperature-related alarms.
Procedure 2-25
Bay low ambient temperature
Category: Equipment
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Select
the Bay low ambient temperature alarm.
3 Check facility ambient temperature and ensure that temperature is not below
the minimum operating ambient temperature operating requirements (5°C or
41°F).
• If facility ambient temperature is below the minimum operating
requirements of the equipment (5°C or 41°F), correct the facility ambient
temperature and go to step 5.
• If facility ambient temperature is above the minimum operating
requirements of the equipment (5°C or 41°F), go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 At the Node Manager workstation, view the alarm and event summary and
details screen and other alarms reporting at the node. Note any additional
alarm information.
• If Fan Overdriven alarm is present, discontinue this procedure and
perform the Fan Overdriven TCP.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-26
BLSR automatic switch to protect
Category: Communication
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Select
the BLSR automatic switch to protect alarm and note the port that displays
the automatic switchover condition.
—continued—
Step Action
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed port is displayed and verify that no
equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
trouble clearing procedure for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
4 Check the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream LTE or
MSTE is another 5400 Switch or CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a
network drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The
far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser should be checked for the following:
• Port and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace the port, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace port SFP/XFP/CFP or equivalent with correct
rate, wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a
transmit 5400 Switch port, expand the Node Manager configuration tree,
select the Physical TP and Basic tabs, and ensure that the provisioned
optical rate is correct. Always lock the port before correcting and unlock
when completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port or
equivalent.)
• The output level of the laser (Node Manager PRTP Physical tab) should
be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform System Description. (Corrective action: clean the
transmit port or equivalent fiber connector, replace the port or equivalent,
and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400 Switch technology.)
The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of the
other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if other
technology) may be defective.
If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical multiplexer tests bad,
repair in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to step 25.
—continued—
Step Action
If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical multiplexer tests good,
go to step 5.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Remove the alarmed port receive fiber. If required, refer to 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing. Insert the receive fiber into a
test set capable of reading bit errors and light level.
6 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 7.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 18.
7 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices and reinsert receive fiber into test set.
8 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 9.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 22.
9 The received light level should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description. Verify
that the received light level is within specification.
—continued—
Step Action
Step Action
18 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
and Equipment Safety Practices.
19 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
20 Under the Go > Configuration menu, select the Physical TP and Basic
tabs.
21 View the Configured Rate box and ensure that the correct optical rate is
selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 22.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
22 Reconnect the fiber, then reinstall the port in accordance with the procedure
titled “Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP” in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
23 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 24.
24 Replace the port with a shelf spare. If required, refer to the procedure titled
“Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP” in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement. Then go to step 27.
25 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 27.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to step 26.
26 Reconnect the receive fiber, then reinstall the port. If required, refer to the
procedure titled “Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP” in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
27 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-27
BLSR default k-bytes defect
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The system raises the BLSR Default K Byte condition if the NE continues to
detect a default K bytes for 2.5 (±0.5) seconds.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab.
3 Select the port that displays the BLSR default k-bytes defect warning, the
source name and additional information.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the downstream far end LTE Receiver (in accordance with the
guidelines of the downstream LTE technology) to identify any Receiver
equipment failure alarms, Near End APS alarms, or incoming line facility
defect alarms.
• If no Receiver equipment failure alarms, or incoming line facility defect
alarms are present on the downstream LTE, go to the next step.
• If any Receiver equipment failure alarms, Near End APS alarms, or
incoming line facility defect alarms are present on the downstream LTE,
discontinue this procedure and clear the noted equipment or facility
defect alarm in accordance with the downstream technology guidelines.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-28
BLSR force switch to protect
Category: Service report
The system clears the Force Switch to Protect condition when the manual
state is cleared by management command or by a higher-priority automatic
switching command.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab.
3 Note the NE that displays the BLSR force switch to protect alarm.
4 Click Go > Protection > BLSR Ring Groups > Traffic Flow and select the
Span Type tab.
5 Select Clear from the Operation Type drop down list.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-29
BLSR improper APS codes
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
In the process of establishing a ring protection switch in a 2-fiber ring, the node
requesting the bridge may briefly receive idle codes with a short path indicator
not destined to it and not from its neighbor, as the intermediate nodes enter
pass through bidirectionally. Although expected in the transition, it is not the
proper response to a ring switch request and is therefore considered an
improper APS code defect. A signal failure response with a bridged indicator
would be a proper response. Similarly, a response with a bridged and
switched indicator and a higher priority request are also proper responses.
Requests irrelevant to the state of the ring include any span protection switch
request to a 2-fiber ring NE, and a request for a lower priority failure when the
ring is already satisfying a higher priority request.
The system raises the BLSR Improper APS Codes condition if the NE
continues to detect improper APS codes for 2.5 (±0.5) seconds.
The system clears the BLSR Improper APS Codes condition when:
• the defect is absent for 10 (±0.5) seconds
• the NE detects a loss of signal defect, loss of frame defect, or line AIS
defect
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node. Repeat for both the near and far end NEs
(both adjacent Switches to the one raising the alarm).
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the NE that displays the BLSR improper APS codes alarm.
3 Expand the NE Equipment Tree.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and execute the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
4 Under the Protection menu, click BLSR/MS-SP from the selection tree and
clear any user-initiated or auto protection switch conditions on the ring.
5 From the NM session on the NE raising the alarm and the adjacent NE, under
Go > Protection > BLSR Ring Groups, click the alarmed BLSR Ring Group
and click Administer. Perform a Lockout of Protection Span (LP-S) on the NE
where the alarm is being raised (near end NE).
6 If the alarm cleared at the NM workstation, stop this procedure.
7 If the alarm did not clear at the NM workstation, procedure with the following
steps.
8 From the NM session on the NE raising the alarm and the adjacent NE, under
Go > Protection > BLSR Ring Groups, click the alarmed BLSR Ring Group
and click Administer. Perform a Lockout of Protection Span (LP-S) on the NE
adjacent to where the alarm is being raised (far end NE).
—continued—
Step Action
9 If the alarm did not clear at the NM workstation, procedure with the following
steps.
10 From the NM session on the alarmed and adjacent Switches, under Go >
Protection > BLSR Ring Groups, attempt to clear the alarm by locking and
unlocking the BLSR Protection Group.
11 If the alarm did not clear at the NM workstation, procedure with the following
steps.
12 Reseat the Line Module (LM) at the far-end Switch.
13 If the alarm did not clear at the NM workstation, procedure with the following
steps.
14 Reseat the Line Module (LM) at the near -end Switch.
15 If the alarm did not clear at the NM workstation, procedure with the following
steps.
16 Replace the LM at the far-end Switch.
17 If the alarm did not clear at the NM workstation, procedure with the following
steps.
18 Replace the LM at the near -end Switch.
19 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-30
BLSR inconsistent APS codes
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
Additional Text:
The system raises the BLSR Inconsistent APS Codes condition if the NE
continues to detect improper APS codes for 2.5 (±0.5) seconds.
The system clears the BLSR Inconsistent APS Codes condition when:
• the defect is absent for 10 (±0.5) seconds.
• the NE detects a loss of signal defect, loss of frame defect, or line AIS
defect.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node. Repeat for both the near and far end NEs
(both adjacent Switches to the one raising the alarm).
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the NE that displays the BLSR inconsistent APS codes
3 At Go > Performance Monitoring, determine the ring displaying the fault.
4 Determine all the faults associated with the port associated with the ring
identified in step 3.
—continued—
Step Action
5 Using the Trouble Clearing Procedures for the faults noted in step 4, clear all
faults.
6 At Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the alarm tab and determine
if the BLSR inconsistent APS codes alarm has cleared.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-31
BLSR lockout of protect
Category: Service report
Additional Text: Lockout of <East Span, West Span, Both East and West
Spans, or Ring> Protection
The system clears the Lockout of Protect condition when the manual state is
cleared by management command.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab. select the
alarm, and note the NE that displays the BLSR lockout of protect alarm.
3 Note the port that displays the Forced Switch To Protect warning.
4 Click Go > Protection > BLSR Ring Groups > Traffic Flow tab and select
the BLSR group identified in step 2.
5 Select the Span Type tab.
6 Select Clear from the Operation Type drop down list.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-32
BLSR lockout of work
Category: Service report
Condition Description:
Additional Text: Lockout of <East Span, West Span, Both East and West
Spans, or Ring> Work
The system clears the Lockout of Work condition when the manual state is
cleared by management command.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the NE that displays the BLSR lockout of work alarm.
3 Click Go > Protection > BLSR Ring Groups > Traffic Flow and select the
Span Type tab.
4 Select Clear from the Operation Type drop down list.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-33
BLSR manual switch to protect
Category: Service report
The system clears the Manual Switch to Protect condition when the manual
state is cleared by management command or by a higher-priority automatic
switching command.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the NE that displays the BLSR manual switch to protect alarm.
3 Click Go > Protection > BLSR Ring Groups > Traffic Flow tab and select
the BLSR group identified in step 2.
4 Select the Span Type tab.
5 Select Clear from the Operation Type drop down list.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-34
BLSR node id mismatch
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The system raises the BLSR Node ID Mismatch condition if the NE continues
to detect improper APS codes for 2.5 (±0.5) seconds.
The system clears the BLSR Node ID Mismatch condition when the:
• the defect is absent for 10 (±0.5) seconds.
• the NE detects a loss of signal defect, loss of frame defect, or line AIS
defect.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node. Repeat for both the near end and far end NEs
(both adjacent Switches to the one raising the alarm.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the NE that displays the BLSR node id mismatch alarm.
3 Expand the Equipment Tree.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Under the Protection menu, click BLSR/MS-SP from the selection tree and
clear any user-initiated or auto protection switch conditions on the ring.
5 From the NM session on the Switch raising the alarm and the adjacent
Switch, click BLSR Ring Groups under the Protection menu. Click both
BLSR protection groups and check to ensure that the correct protection unit
orientation (east-west) is used. If the protection unit orientation is correct, go
to step 7. If the protection unit orientation is incorrect, change to the correct
orientation and go to step 6.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared at the NM workstation.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 7.
7 From the NM session on the alarmed and adjacent Switches, click BLSR Ring
Groups under the Protection menu. Ensure that duplicate node IDs are not
provisioned for two or more Switches in the ring (ring map corrupted). If no
duplications are found, go to substep 4. If duplications are found, correct
duplications and go to step 8.
8 Verify that the alarm cleared at the NM workstation.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 9.
9 From the NM session on the alarmed and adjacent Switches, click BLSR Ring
Groups under the Protection menu. Attempt to clear the alarm by locking,
then unlocking the BLSR protection group.
10 Verify that the alarm cleared at the NM workstation.
— If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
— If the alarm did not clear, go to step 11.
11 Verify that the physical (fiber) interconnects and OSRP links and the Switch
and adjacent NEs match the ring map. If they match, go to step 15. If they do
not match, reconfigure the physical interconnects and OSRP links to the
proper configuration and go to step 12.
12 Verify that the alarm cleared at the NM workstation.
— If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
— If the alarm did not clear, go to step 13.
13 Reseat the Line Module (LM) at the far-end Switch.
14 Verify that the alarm cleared at the NM workstation.
— If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
— If the alarm did not clear, go to step 15.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-35
BLSR protection degrade condition
Category: Communication
Additional Text: The available protection facilities on the BLSR Span [Span ID] are
degraded.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab. Select the
alarm, and note the NE that displays the BLSR protection degrade condition
and note the PU and span (East or West) obtained from the additional alarm
text information.
3 Click on Go > Protection > Line Level> BLSR/MS-SP screen, select the
Protection Group that contains the alarmed Protection Unit.
4 In the detail screen, disable the Protection Exerciser by unchecking the
Protection Exerciser East or Protection Exerciser West as appropriate.
5 Click Accept.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-36
BLSR protection group misconfiguration
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node. Repeat for both the near end and far end NEs
(both adjacent Switches to the one raising the alarm.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the NE that displays the BLSR protection group
misconfiguration and note any additional alarm text information.
3 At the Go > Protection > Line Level> BLSR/MS-SP screen, open the Ring
demonstrating the alarm.
4 Record the ring settings.
5 Repeat step 1 through step 4 for each node in the ring, as needed, to clear
the following conditions as noted in the alarm additional text.
• Ensure that each East span in the ring connects to a West span on the
neighboring node.
• Ensure that each Working Line connects to a Working Line and that each
Protect line connects to a Protect Line around the ring.
• Ensure that each node on the ring has the same VLSR, TLSR, or 2F-
BLSR/MS-SPRing setting on all nodes.
• Ensure that each node on the ring has the same Ring ID.
• Ensure that no two nodes on the ring have the same node ID.
• Ensure that there are not more than 16 nodes in the ring.
• Ensure that asymmetric/symmetric provisioning is consistent between
nodes.
6 Correct any of the above errors.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-37
Channel contention
Category: Communication
NM Additional Text:
This alarm is raised against the line facility of all WL3-based platforms
(TSLM1D-WL3, OSLM2-WL3 and OSLM5-WL3n circuit packs) when the
provisioned wavelength/ frequency is already in use and is detected by the
circuit pack.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the facility that displays the Channel Contention alarm.
3 Check and ensure the following provisioning information is correct on the
card:
• ENM is matching the other end of the link.
• Differential coding matches the other end of the link.
If all the provisioning information above is correct and the alarm is still active,
then disable Channel Contention Detection.
4 If the original alarm is cleared, the procedure is complete. If the alarm is not
cleared, continue with the next step.
—continued—
Step Action
5 If the alarm is not cleared and the facility wavelength is not already in use on
the network, disable Channel Contention Detection and Avoidance on the
PTP screen Coherent tab.
6 If the alarm does not clear, contact your next level of support or your Ciena
support group.
—end—
Procedure 2-38
Chassis IDP Failed
Category: Equipment
The 5400 Switch ID stored on the backplane EEPROM is used to brand CTMs
when they are installed in the 5400 Switch. CTM branding assigns a unique
ID to a node chassis and stores that ID in the persistent storage of the CTM.
This allows the CTM to identify circumstances where they are placed in a
foreign node chassis. In such instances, the CTM can force the user to accept
the existing provisioning or reconfigure the alien CTM prior to running the
system software.
Procedure 2-39
Circuit pack over temperature
Category: Equipment
Circuit Pack Over Temperature is generated when any one of the monitored
temperatures on a circuit pack cross its over temperature threshold.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
Circuit pack over temperature alarm, and note other alarms reporting at the
node and any additional alarm information. Check for related alarms in the
following order:
• If there are any input power alarms present, discontinue this procedure
and perform the appropriate input power trouble clearing procedure.
(Input power problems may affect the fans and ultimately bay cooling.)
• If there are any CFU replaceable unit problem alarms, discontinue this
procedure and perform the associated CFU replaceable unit problem
trouble clearing procedure.
ATTENTION
Do not discontinue this procedure in favor of Fan Overdriven alarms. The
fans always increase in RPM if there are any temperature-related alarms.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
—continued—
Step Action
3 Check the ambient temperature of the facility and verify that it does not
exceed the operating temperature requirements of the equipment (40°C or
104°F).
• If facility ambient temperature is below 40°C or 104°F, go to step 4.
• If facility ambient temperature is above 40°C or 104°F, correct the office
ambient temperature, then go to step 10.
4 Determine if the air filter or circuit pack blanks were previously checked while
executing this procedure.
• If the air filter or circuit pack blanks were checked, go to step 8.
• If the air filter or circuit pack blanks were not checked, go to step 5.
5 At the node, remove and inspect the air filter in accordance with the Remove
and Install Air Filter procedure in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault
Management - Module Replacement and replace if needed.
6 At the node, inspect for and replace any circuit pack blanks that are missing
in any empty slots of Shelf A, Shelf B, or Shelf C. Ensure that all other covers
are correctly installed.
7 Determine if the air filter was replaced in step 5 or circuit packs blanks were
installed in step 6.
• If the air filter was replaced or circuit pack blanks were installed, go to
step 10.
• If the air filter was not replaced and no circuit pack blanks were installed,
go to step 8.
8 Determine if the alarmed circuit pack was previously replaced while executing
this procedure.
• If the alarmed circuit pack was replaced, go to step 10.
• If the alarmed circuit pack was not replaced, go to step 9.
—continued—
Step Action
ATTENTION
It may take up to one hour for the temperature to stabilize and the alarm to
clear.
Procedure 2-40
Clock mode not normal
Category: Quality of Service
Transitions from Normal mode to the other modes due to Loss of Reference
or a Jump in Frequency produces the alarm.
Clock mode refers to the set {normal, fast start, holdover, free-run}. Normal is
the normal mode of operation when an external source is the timing reference;
however, the System can also be provisioned to run free, using its own internal
reference.
Clock Mode Not Normal condition is raise when the Internal Synch PG is
operating in fast-start, holdover, or free-run based on the autonomous
selection of these modes.
Clock Mode Not Normal condition is not raised during forced holdover or
forced free-run operation.
Clock Mode Not Normal condition clears and re-raises with the new timing
mode if the SyncPG changes between fast-start, holdover, and free-run.
Clock Mode Not Normal condition clears when the timing mode of the Sync
PG is in the normal mode of operation.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
Clock mode not normal alarm, and note the alarm. Note any additional
reported timing alarms In the following order:
• If the All References Failed alarm is present, discontinue this procedure
and perform the trouble clearing procedure for the All redundant sync
units failed alarm.
• If any Replaceable unit missing, Replaceable unit problem, or
Replaceable unit type mismatch alarms are raised against either of the
Control and Timing Modules, discontinue this procedure and perform the
associated TCP.
• If the additional information indicates that the current mode is Fast Start,
wait 15 minutes, then go to step 6.
• If the additional information indicates that the current mode is Holdover
or Free Run, go to step 3.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
3 Verify that at least one BITS input is active. From the field Node Manager
workstation, click Go > Administration > Timing Reference > Sync PGPU.
In the List frame, click TimingInput. Click the Protection Units tab and
check the Protect State.
• If at least one TimingInput Reference Protect State is active, go to step 4.
• If no BITS inputs are active, discontinue this procedure and perform the
trouble clearing procedure for the All redundant sync units failed alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Verify that the clock was not manually forced into Hold Over mode by
selecting the Protection Group tab and note the current operating mode.
• If the mode does not indicate Hold Over, go to step 5.
• If the mode indicates Hold Over, change the current operating mode to
Normal and click Accept.
5 Verify that the clock mode transitions into Fast Start, then changes to
Normal.
ATTENTION
It can take up to 700 seconds for the clock mode to transition from Fast Start
to Normal.
Procedure 2-41
Communications subsystem conflict
Category: Communication
Object Class:
Condition Description:
The system raises this condition when the provisioned and reported IP
address for the neighbor do not match resulting in address conflict. The
condition is cleared when the provisioned and reported IP address for the
neighbor match resolving the address conflict, or when the IP over DCC/GCC
service is unprovisioned.
The system also raises this condition when a PPP configuration conflict is
detected across a DCC/GCC link. The condition is cleared when the PPP
configuration conflict is corrected or the PPP link is deleted.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the NE that displays the Communications subsystem conflict
alarm.
3 Verify that the neighbor node IP address in the IP Address field is the correct
IP address for the subtended node.
4 If the IP address is provisioned incorrectly, delete the provisioned Neighbor
node IP address and recreate with the correct IP address.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-42
Configuration mismatch
Category: Service report
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the Configuration mismatch warning,
the source name, and additional information.
3 Note the additional information local and far end configuration parameters. If
the configuration parameters need to be changed (usually interface type) on
the terminating end point, log on to the appropriate node and repeat this step.
4 Change the configuration parameters to match the local or far end as required
then click Accept.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-43
Co-routed SNC is degraded
Category: Communication
NM Probable Cause: Some but not all member SNCs are Unavailable
NM Additional Text: Some but not all SNCs in the group are Unavailable
This alarm is raised when some but not all of the SNCs in a co-routed group
are unavailable.
This alarm is cleared when all of the SNCs in the co-routed group move to
Working state or Starting State.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the connection that displays the Co-routed SNC is degraded
alarm.
3 Check the Group’s constraints and DTLs if applicable to ensure, sufficient
bandwidth for setup is available.
4 Ensure the Group bandwidth is sufficient to establish remaining member
SNCs.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-44
Co-routed SNC is unavailable
Category: Communication
This alarm is raised when all of the SNCs in a co-routed group are unavailable.
This alarm is cleared when at least one member SNCs return to Working
state.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the connection that displays the Co-routed SNC is
unavailable alarm.
3 Check the Group's constraints and DTLs if applicable to ensure, sufficient
bandwidth for setup is available.
4 Ensure the Group bandwidth is sufficient to establish member SNCs
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-45
DC power failed
Category: Equipment
Condition Description: The input power is not present, the fuse is missing or
blown.
Alternatively, a feed has been detected with a voltage level at or below -40
VDC. This potentially represents a last gasp, as power will be disabled in the
range of -38.5±1 VDC.
A DC Power Failed is cleared if all circuit packs detect an input power above -
41 VDC on both redundant power feeds.
Step Action
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the DC power failed alarm in the display and note any
additional power related problems or probable cause information.
3 If the probable cause indicates an on board fuse failure, go to step 11.
• If the rectifier fail alarm is reported by multiple circuit packs, go to step 4.
4 At the rear of the node, verify all power arms of the -48VDC supply voltages
at the PDU shelf in accordance with the Verifying -48 VDC Supply Voltage
procedure in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing.
• If supply voltage is within spec on all measured feeds, go to step 5.
• If no supply voltage is present on any one of the measured feeds, there
is an external rectifier failure. Restore the correct supply voltage in
accordance with local guidelines, then go to step 5.
• Contact the next level of support for help if needed.
5 Determine if any fuse/circuit breaker is open/tripped at the PDU shelf.
• If the fuse/circuit breaker are open/tripped, go to step 8.
• If the fuse/circuit breaker are not open/tripped, go to step 6.
6 Open all doors and covers on the bay and visually inspect for obvious
indications of a power short. (Power short indications include smoke, burn
marks, discoloration, and so forth.)
• If obvious power short indications are present, complete this procedure
with the next level of support. Go to step 7.
• If no obvious power short indications are present, go to step 10.
7 At the node, refer to 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management -
Module Replacement and replace any burnt or discolored modules in
accordance with the appropriate procedure as listed below, then go to step
12.
• Removing and installing a 5400 Switch fan assembly
• Remove and install 5430 Switch CTM
• Remove and install 5410 Switch CTM
• Removing and installing a 5400 Switch module
• Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP
• Removing and installing a 5400 Switch line module
• Removing and installing a 5430 Switch display module
• Removing and installing a 5430 Switch I/O module
• Removing and installing a 5410 Switch I/O module
—continued—
Step Action
8 For all feeds noted in step 5, replace the fuse/toggle the circuit breaker to ON.
9 Determine if any associated fuse/circuit breaker opens/trips.
• If the fuse/breaker opens/, go to step 12.
• If the fuse/breaker did not open/trip, go to step 10.
10 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm persists, contact the next level of support.
11 At the node, replace the module in accordance with the appropriate
procedure as listed above.
ATTENTION
If alarm clears, check module history to see if the alarm is intermittent. If
alarm is intermittent, contact next level of support.
Procedure 2-46
DCN interface link failure
Category: Communication
Condition Description: The Ethernet level link is down on one or more of the
four DCN ports (MAIN1, AUX1, MAIN2, AUX2)
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
NE that displays the DCN interface link failure alarm.
3 Replace the Ethernet cable connecting the affected DCN port to the external
router.
• If the alarm exists go to step 4
• If the alarm clears go to step 5
4 Connect the affected DCN port to a different port on the external router.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-47
Degraded switch fabric
Category: Communication
NM Probable Cause: The number of active Switch Modules is less than the
number of provisioned Switch Modules.
NM Additional Text: The number of active Switch Modules is less than the
number of provisioned Switch Modules.
ATTENTION
The Degraded switch fabric alarm can be raised during commissioning,
during the time when the first line module has not yet been installed. The
alarm clears when the first line module is installed.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
NE that displays the Degraded switch fabric alarm.
3 Check the number of Switch Modules inserted.
4 Verify the amount of SMs required for this configuration, are in accordance
with the “Primary Switch Module Supported in the 5400 Switch” listed in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
5 Insert SMs as required.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-48
DPanel mismatch
Category: Equipment
NM Additional Text: NA
Condition Description: The provisioned DPANEL and PDU's are not the
same generation.
The DPANEL Mismatch alarm is raised when the installed DPANEL and PDUs
are not of the same generation.
To clear the alarm, the user must install equipment so that the display panel
and the PDUs are of the same generation: either all Gen 2 units, or all legacy
units. DPANEL Mismatch is cleared when the 5430 Switch detects that the
display panel and the PDUs are all of the same generation.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Inventory, which causes the Basic inventory tab to be displayed.
Expand the equipment tree until the following units are displayed: PDU-A,
PDU-B, and PDU-DPANEL. For each unit, proceed as follows. Select the unit
in the equipment tree, and make note of whether the unit is a Gen 2 unit, as
indicated by the value of the Installed Card Type field on the Basic inventory
tab.
3 At the node, replace units so that all are legacy units or so that all are Gen 2
units.
• For instructions for installing legacy units, see 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
• For instructions for installing Gen 2 units, see 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform 5430 15Tb Upgrade and 5400 Packet-Optical Platform 5430
PDU Upgrade.
4 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-49
Duplicate adjacency discovered
Category: Communication
NM Additional Text:
Condition Description: More than one adjacency match exists for the PTP.
The Duplicate adjacency discovered alarm is raised against the PTP when
more than a single match exists for the PTP (more than one SPLI Match
associated with the MoPtp object exists).
The Duplicate adjacency discovered alarm is cleared against the PTP when
less than two matches exists for the PTP (less than two SPLI Match objects
associated the MoPtp object exist).
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
NE that displays the Duplicate adjacency discovered alarm.
3 Verify that less than two matches exists for the PTP in alarm.
4 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-50
ESLM audit mismatch
Category: Equipment
NM Additional Text:
Condition Description:
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, then
select the ESLM Audit Mismatch alarm.
3 Refer to the Additional Text to determine the cause of the alarm and/or
recommended action to correct the mismatch.
• If the source of the mismatch is identified, check the ESLM configuration
data and reprovision incorrect parameters as necessary.
4 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-51
ESLM card in Hold
Category: Equipment
NM Additional Text:
Condition Description:
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, then
select the ESLM card in Hold alarm. Note that the Alarms table identifies
which ESLM is the source of the alarm.
3 Refer to the Additional Text to determine the cause of the alarm and/or
recommended action to clear the Hold state.
• If indicated, perform the recommended action.
4 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-52
Ethernet failure indication condition (Ethernet LFI)
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab.
3 Select the port that displays the Ethernet failure indication condition (Ethernet
LFI) alarm.
4 Inspect far end client equipment configuration and operational state and
perform any required configuration changes or repairs.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-53
Ethernet forward fault indication
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab. Select the
NE that displays the Ethernet forward fault indication alarm, and note the port
that displays:
the Communication warning
the source name
probable cause
additional information
• If the probable cause indicates Ethernet Forward Fault Indication,
proceed to step 3.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-54
Ethernet-LOF
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the NE that displays the Ethernet-LOF alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify that
no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
4 Check the far end upstream laser transmitter and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. The far end upstream laser
transmitter should be checked for the following:
• SFP/XFP/CFP and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment
failures or Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective
action: replace SFP/XFP/CFP, LM, or equivalent.)
—continued—
Step Action
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace/provision SFP/XFP/CFP with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch port, select the port, expand the Node Manager
configuration tree, click Go > Inventory and select the Basic tab, then
ensure that the provisioned optical rate is correct. Always lock the port
before correcting and unlock when completed.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit port fiber connector, replace the
SFP/XFP/CFP, and/or correct improper Line Build Out if not a 5400
Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the test result for the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical
multiplexer is bad, repair in accordance with upstream technology
guidelines, then go to step 22.
• If the test result for the far end upstream laser transmitter is good, go to
step 5.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
—continued—
Step Action
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Check if the service type of the upstream node is set to Ethernet and not set
to transmit SONET, OTN or other transport standard protocols.
• If the upstream node is a 5400 Switch, select the remote transmitter port
and click Go > Configuration > ptp and select the basic tab to verify the
service type.
• If service type indicates Ethernet go to next step. If not, correct the
service type in accordance with procedures listed in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, and then go to step
23.
6 Remove the receive fiber in accordance with Removing, deleting or installing
an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management -
Module Replacement, and insert the receive fiber into a test set capable of
reading bit errors, as well as light level.
7 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 8.
• If no bit errors are reported, go to step 15.
8 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices and reinsert receive fiber into the test set.
9 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 10.
• If no bit errors are reported, go to step 19.
10 The received light level should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description. Verify
that the received light level is within specification.
• If the received light level is within specification, go to step 14.
• If the received light level is not within specification, go to step 11.
11 Determine if there are one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmitter checked in step 4 and the Receiver in alarm).
• If there are no WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 12.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 13.
—continued—
Step Action
12 The output of the far end upstream transmitter was previously tested in step
4. The low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty or
defective fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmitter and
the receiver 5400 Switch. Isolate and clean/repair the fiber or connector
trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired, go to
step 22.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired, go
to step 24.
13 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch port in alarm. Correct any problems that are found.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 22.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 24.
14 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmitter and the receiver 5400 Switch in alarm in accordance
with internal guidelines. In addition to checking for higher rate WDM system
alarms and PM data, this isolation should include checking any fibers and
connectors on the input to the first WDM system and fibers and connectors
between multiple WDM systems, as well as output lasers from one WDM
system to another.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 22.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 24.
15 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
& Equipment Safety Practices.
16 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
17 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree to the
port in alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
18 Click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs and ensure that the provisioned optical
rate is correct by viewing the list frame Rate to ensure that the correct optical
rate is selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 19.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
19 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP/XFP/CFP in
accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
20 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 21.
21 Replace the module and then go to step 24.
22 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level that is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level that is out of
specification, go to step 24.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level that is out of
specification, go to
step 23.
23 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP/XFP.CFP in
accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
24 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-55
Ethernet-LOS
Category: Communication
A Loss of Signal (LOS) alarm is declared when the LOS defect persists for 2.5
(±0.5) seconds or an LOS defect is present when the conditions for declaring
an LOF failure are also met (LOF is inhibited when LOS is declared). The LOS
alarm is cleared when the line recovers or the port is admin locked.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab. Select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the Ethernet-LOS alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed port is displayed and verify that no
equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream laser transmitter in accordance with that
technology's guidelines. The far end upstream laser transmitter should be
checked for the following:
• SFP/XFP/CFP and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment
failures or Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective
action: replace SFP/XFP/CFP, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: re-place/provision SFP/XFP/CFP with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch port, select the port, expand the Node Manager
configuration tree, click Go > Inventory and select the Basic tab, then
ensure that the provisioned optical rate is correct. Always lock the port
before correcting and unlock when completed).
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit SFP/XFP/CFP fiber connector,
replace the SFP/XFP/CFP, and/or correct improper Line Build Out (LBO)
if not a 5400 Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream laser transmitter tests bad, repair in accordance
with upstream technology guidelines, then go to step 22.
• If the far end upstream laser transmitter tests good, go to step 5.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Remove the receive fiber and insert the receive fiber into a test set capable
of reading bit errors, as well as light level.
6 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If the test set reported bit errors, go to step 7.
• If the test set did not report bit errors, go to step 14.
7 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices, and reinsert receive fiber into the test set.
8 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If the test set reported bit errors, go to step 9.
• If the test set did not report bit errors, go to step 18.
9 The received light level should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description. Verify
that the received light level is within specification.
• If the received light level is within specification, go to step 13.
• If the received light level is not within specification, go to step 10.
10 Determine if there one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmitter checked in step 4 and the Receiver in alarm).
• If no WDM line systems were in the upstream path, go to step 11.
• If any WDM line systems were in the upstream path, go to step 12.
—continued—
Step Action
11 The output of the far end upstream transmitter was previously tested in step
4. The low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty or
defective fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmitter and
the receiver 5400 Switch. Isolate and clean/repair the fiber or connector
trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired, go to
step 21
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors was cleaned or repaired in
step 23
12 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch port in alarm. Correct any problems that are found.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 21.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 23.
13 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmitter and the receiver 5400 Switch in alarm in accordance
with internal guidelines. In addition to checking for higher rate WDM system
alarms and PM data, this isolation should include checking any fibers and
connectors on the input to the first WDM system and fibers and connectors
between multiple WDM systems, as well as output lasers from one WDM
system to another.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 21.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 23.
14 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
& Equipment Safety Practices.
15 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
16 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree and
select the port in alarm.
17 Click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs and ensure that the provisioned optical
rate is correct by viewing the list frame Rate to ensure that the correct optical
rate is selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 18.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-56
Ethernet-RFI
Category: Communication
An Ethernet Remote Failure Indicator alarm is declared when the Ethernet far
end defect persists for 2.5 (±0.5) seconds and is cleared when the Ethernet
far end defect is absent for 10 (±0.5) seconds.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab. Select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the Communication warning, the
source name, probable cause and additional information.
3 If the probable cause and additional information indicates Ethernet RFI then
proceed to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the signal received by the downstream node to identify this fault.
5 If any alarms are reported, resolve or refer in accordance with internal
guidelines. When resolved, go to step 6.
6 Recheck the Ethernet Remote Fault Indication alarm status.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-57
External authentication server unavailable
Category: Reporting Event
Object Class:
NM Additional Text:
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Administration > Security > LDAP Key Mgmt and note
reachability Status on all provisioned LDAP servers.
3 If reachability Status is Unavailable on only one server, troubleshoot.
4 Set LDAP Key Mgmt Mode to Disabled and click Apply.
5 Set LDAP Key Mgmt Mode to Enabled and click Apply.
6 If the alarm is raised again, disable the server and log in or log out of the
server.
7 If the alarm is raised, ensure the following server provisioning values on the
network element are correct:
• server IP address
• server port
8 Check the status of the server. Ensure the status is ON.
9 Log in or log out of the network element.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-58
Expansion switch link down
Category: Communication
ATTENTION
Only ES1 can be enabled in this release.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
Expansion switch link down alarm, and note the Probable Cause and
Additional Information.
3 Check Ethernet link to local router. If alarm clears, end this procedure.
4 Verify remote 6500 link and ES/ILAN port configuration. If alarm clears, end
this procedure.
5 From the Node Manager workstation, click Go > Inventory, expand the
equipment tree and select the secondary CTM.
6 Ensure Operational State is Enabled and Procedural Status is
Synchronized.
7 Select the CTM reporting the alarm and click Soft Reset and then click
Accept when prompted.
—continued—
Step Action
8 Refer to the 5400 Switch Service manual and remove and replace the CTM
reporting the alarm.
9 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-59
Fabric Upgrade In-Progress
Category: Communication
NM Additional Text: NA
Condition Description:
TL1 String:
Procedure 2-60
Fan overdriven
Category: Equipment
A Fan Overdriven alarm indicates that a device on a circuit pack is above its
set point temperature, but not necessarily above its max operating threshold.
Fan Overdriven is cleared when the commanded fan speed falls below 7500
RPM.
When the alarm is raised, the network operations center (NOC) should check
for any stimulus that would cause the system temperature to rise and fans to
be over driven. Stimuli may include: a clogged air filter, a stuck exhaust louver,
or a disruption in facility cooling. If the stimuli are addressed or do not exist,
one should expect the alarm to clear within two hours.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab. Select the
Fan overdriven alarm, and note any additional equipment alarm information
related to the node.
• If there are any input power alarms present, discontinue this procedure
and perform the appropriate input power trouble clearing procedure.
(Input power problems may affect the fans and ultimately bay cooling.)
• If there are any CFU replaceable unit problem alarms, discontinue this
procedure and perform the associated CFU replaceable unit problem
trouble clearing procedure.
• If there are no related equipment or high temperature alarms, go to step
3.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
3 At the node, remove and inspect the air filter in accordance with the Remove
and Install Air Filter procedure in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault
Management - Module Replacement and replace if needed.
4 At the node, inspect for and replace any circuit pack blanks that are missing
in any empty slots of Shelf A, Shelf B, or Shelf C. Ensure that all other covers
are correctly installed.
5 Wait two hours, and then verify that the alarm cleared at the Node Manager
workstation.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-61
Fan speed mismatch
Category: Equipment
NM Additional Text:
Condition Description:
Fan Speed Mismatch condition is raised when the actual fan speed does not
match the fan speed set by the System.
Fan Speed Mismatch condition is cleared when the actual fan speed matches
the fan speed set by the System.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
Fan speed mismatch alarm, and note any additional equipment alarm
information related to the node.
• If there are any input power alarms present, discontinue this procedure
and perform the appropriate input power trouble clearing procedure.
(Input power problems may affect the fans and ultimately bay cooling.)
• If there are any CFU replaceable unit problem alarms, discontinue this
procedure and perform the associated CFU replaceable unit problem
trouble clearing procedure.
• If there are no related equipment or high temperature alarms, go to step
3.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
3 At the node, identify the failed fan tray assembly and immediately replace with
a new fan tray assembly.
4 Verify that the alarm cleared at the Node Manager workstation.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-62
FCC automatic switch
Category: Service report
NM Additional Text:
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the FCC automatic switch condition.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed port is displayed and verify that no
equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch network, the upstream LTE or MSTE is another 5400
Switch. If the line in alarm is a network drop, the upstream technology is
typically an Aggregator/MUX. The far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser
should be checked for the following:
• Port and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace the port, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace port or equivalent with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch port, expand the Node Manager configuration tree, select
the Physical TP and Basic tabs, and ensure that the provisioned optical
rate is correct. Always lock the port before correcting and unlock when
completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port or
equivalent.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit port or equivalent fiber connector,
replace the port or equivalent, and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400
Switch technology.)
The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of the
other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if other
technology) may be defective.
If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical multiplexer tests bad,
repair in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to step 25.
If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical multiplexer tests good,
go to step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Remove the alarmed port receive fiber. Insert the receive fiber into a test set
capable of reading bit errors and light level.
6 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 7.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 18.
7 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices and reinsert receive fiber into test set.
8 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 9.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 22.
9 The received light level should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description. Verify
that the received light level is within specification.
• If the received light level is within specification, go to step 16.
• If the received light level is not within specification, go to step 11.
—continued—
Step Action
10 Determine if there one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit LTE or MSTE checked in step 4 and the receive LTE or
MSTE in alarm).
• If there are no WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 12.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 14.
11 The output of the far end upstream LTE or MSTE was previously tested in
step 4. The low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty
or defective fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit LTE or
MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or MSTE. Isolate and clean/repair the
fiber or connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
12 Determine if a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired in
step 12.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired in step
12, go to step 14.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired in
step 12, go to step 26.
13 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch port in alarm. Correct any problems that are found.
14 Determine if any problems were isolated and corrected in step 14.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected in step 14, go to step 16.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected in step 14, go to step 26.
15 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit LTE or MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or
MSTE in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
16 Determine if any problems were isolated and corrected in step 16.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected in step 16, go to step 18.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected in step 16, go to step 26.
17 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
& Equipment Safety Practices.
—continued—
Step Action
18 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
19 Under the Go > Configuration menu, select the Physical TP and Basic
tabs.
20 View the Configured Rate box and ensure that the correct optical rate is
selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 22.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
21 Reconnect the receive fiber, then reinstall the port.
22 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 24.
23 Replace the port with a shelf spare and then go to step 26.
24 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 26.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to step 25.
25 Reconnect the receive fiber, then reinstall the port.
26 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-63
FCC fail to revert
Category: Reporting event
The FCC fail to revert event is raised when an FCC fails to revert within the
TODR window.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the module that displays the FCC fail to revert alarm.
3 Verify no automatic switches are active.
• If automatic switches are active or the original alarm has not cleared, then
go to step 4
• If alarm has cleared, then go to step 6
4 Determine if a user switch (manual, forced or lockout) is active. release the
switch.
• If no switches are active or the alarm has cleared, then go to step 5
• If alarm has cleared, then go to step 6
5 If the alarm remains active, ensure that no other alarm is active
6 Verify that the warning cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-64
FCC fail to switch
Category: Communication
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab.
3 Note and clear any path faults protection switch byte failure, ASNCP Failure
to Switch, and far end protect line fail alarms.
4 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-65
FCC forced switch to protect
Category: Service report
NM Additional Text:
An FCC forced switch to protect warning is raised when a forced switch to the
protect path is initiated. The warning clears when a higher-priority switch is
initiated or when the forced switch is released.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab. Select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the FCC fail to switch condition.
3 Under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Protection Unit tab,
select the protection unit identified in step 2 from the list.
4 Verify the state of the working path in the Administer/Status field; it should be
OKAY.
5 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
6 Click Yes in confirmation dialog.
7 If there are several locked protection units in the FCC group, from the list
under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the
FCC SNCP protection group.
8 Click the Release button in Administer All PUs field.
9 Click Accept.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-66
FCC forced switch to working
Category: Service report
NM Additional Text:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the FCC forced switch to working
condition.
3 Under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Protection Unit tab,
select the protection unit identified in step 2 from the list.
4 Verify the state of the working path in the Administer/Status field; it should be
OKAY.
5 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
6 Click Yes in confirmation dialog.
7 If there are several locked protection units in the FCC group, from the list
under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the
FCC SNCP protection group.
8 Click Accept.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-67
FCC lockout of protect
Category: Service report
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the FCC lockout of protect condition.
3 Under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Protection Unit tab,
select the protection unit identified in step 2 from the list.
4 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
5 If there are several locked protection units in the SNCP group, from the list
under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the
FCC SNCP protection group.
6 Click the Release button in Administer All PUs field.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-68
FCC manual switch to protect
Category: Service report
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the FCC manual switch to protect
condition.
3 Under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Protection Unit tab,
select the protection unit identified in step 2 from the list.
4 Click the Release button in Administer/Status field.
5 If there are several switched protection units in the ASNCP group, under the
Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the FCC SNCP
protection group from the list.
6 Click the Release button in Administer all PUs field.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-69
FCC manual switch to working
Category: Service report
NM Additional Text:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the FCC manual switch to working
condition.
3 Under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Protection Unit tab,
select the protection unit identified in step 2 from the list.
4 Verify the state of the protect path in the Administer/Status field; it should be
OKAY.
5 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
6 Click YES in the confirmation dialog.
7 If there are several locked protection units in the ASNCP group, from the list
under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the
FCC SNCP protection group.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-70
FEC type mismatch
Category: Communication
Probable Cause:
NM Additional Text:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the FEC type mismatch condition.
3 Check the FEC settings at both the upstream and local nodes.
4 Change the configuration parameters to the local or far end nodes as
required.
5 Verify the FEC settings at both ends are similar.
6 Click Accept.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-71
Firmware mismatch
category: Equipment
Condition Description:
In most cases, software and firmware upgrade to the node and its modules
does not affect service, and the node updates them automatically when
necessary. However, there are a few FPGAs that cannot be upgraded in-
service. Rather than causing a service hit as a side-effect of an upgrade, the
System declares a firmware mismatch condition, which flags the human
operator to execute an upgrade procedure (typically by way of switching traffic
or administratively locking the module).
Firmware mismatch can occur in two ways: either the module is newly
installed, in which case it is not providing service and can be upgraded
automatically, or some level of the control plane is
re-booting, in which case the data plane may be carrying service and firmware
cannot be automatically upgraded.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the circuit pack that displays the Firmware mismatch alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Click Inventory and expand the equipment tree to the LM identified in step 2.
5 Place the LM into HIR and click Accept.
6 Remove LM from HIR and click Accept.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support
—end—
Procedure 2-72
FPGA SEU event
Category: Equipment
Probable Cause: Single event upset: soft CRC error event of line module
circuit pack.
NM Additional Text:
TL1 String:
The alarm is generated when the following single event upset (SEU) is
detected: soft CRC error event on line module circuit pack.
—end—
Procedure 2-73
Generic AIS
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The CBR PN11 alarm condition is raised when a dPN11 defect persists for 2.5
(±0.5) seconds.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the NE that displays the Generic AIS alarm.
3 In the upstream NE:
• If TTP is unlocked go to step 4:
• If SNC has an unavailable alarm then go to step 5.
4 Lock TTP and go to step 6
5 Clear SNC alarm and go to step 6
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-74
GFP Loss of frame delineation
Category: Communication
Object Class: CG
GFP loss of frame delineation alarm is raised against the GFP object if an
dLFD defect persists for 2.5 (± 0.5) seconds.
The GFP loss of frame delineation alarm is cleared when the dLFD defect is
absent for 10 (± 0.5) seconds.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the MoGfpAp object that displays the GFP Loss of frame
delineation alarm.
3 Verify the TransparencyMode on the associated ETTP objects are same on
both ends of the tunnel.
4 Clear any upstream OTN faults (LOS, LOC, LOF, LOM, AIS, LCK, OCI, or
Payload Type Mismatches).
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-75
GFP UPI mismatch
Category: Communication
Object Class: CG
Condition Description:
The UPI Mismatch alarm is raised against the GFP object if an dUPM defect
persists for 2.5 (± 0.5) seconds.
The GFP UPM condition clears when the dUPM defect is absent for 10 (± 0.5)
seconds.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the MoGfpAp object that displays the GFP UPI mismatch
alarm.
3 Verify the expected and received UPI code in the additional text of the alarm.
4 If the UPI transmitted from the remote end MoGfpAp object is different than
the one expected, check the configuration on the MoGfpAp object on both
near end and far end of the Ethernet tunnel.
—continued—
Step Action
ATTENTION
UPI values on the MoGfpAp is not user configurable in R 2.1. It is driven by
the TransparencyMode on the ETTP object.
Procedure 2-76
HIBER
Category: Communication
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab.
3 Select the alarm, and note the port that displays the "HiBER" alarm.
4 Click Go > Configuring > PTPs, check actual received optical power on
associated PTP and verify that received optical power meets the optical
interface specifications. If received optical power is outside the specified
operating range, trouble shoot / repair the link.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-77
High temperature
Category: Equipment
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
Circuit pack over temperature alarm, and note other alarms reporting at the
node and any additional alarm information. Check for related alarms in the
following order:
— If there are any input power alarms present, discontinue this
procedure and perform the appropriate input power trouble clearing
procedure. (Input power problems may affect the fans and ultimately
bay cooling.)
— If there are any CFU replaceable unit problem alarms, discontinue
this procedure and perform the associated CFU replaceable unit
problem trouble clearing procedure.
ATTENTION
Do not discontinue this procedure in favor of Fan Overdriven alarms. The
fans always increase in RPM if there are any temperature-related alarms.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
3 Check the ambient temperature of the facility and verify that it does not
exceed the operating temperature requirements of the equipment (40°C or
104°F).
— If facility ambient temperature is below 40°C or 104°F, go to step 4.
— If facility ambient temperature is above 40°C or 104°F, correct the
office ambient temperature, then go to step 10.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Determine if the air filter or circuit pack blanks were previously checked while
executing this procedure.
— If the air filter or circuit pack blanks were checked, go to step 8.
— If the air filter or circuit pack blanks were not checked, go to step 5.
5 At the node, remove and inspect the air filter in accordance with the Remove
and Install Air Filter procedure in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault
Management - Module Replacement and replace if needed.
6 At the node, inspect for and replace any circuit pack blanks that are missing
in any empty slots of Shelf A, Shelf B, or Shelf C. Ensure that all other covers
are correctly installed.
7 Determine if the air filter was replaced in step 5 or circuit packs blanks were
installed in step 6.
— If the air filter was replaced or circuit pack blanks were installed, go
to step 10.
— If the air filter was not replaced and no circuit pack blanks were
installed, go to step 8.
8 Determine if the alarmed circuit pack was previously replaced while executing
this procedure.
— If the alarmed circuit pack was replaced, go to step 10.
— If the alarmed circuit pack was not replaced, go to step 9.
9 At the node, replace circuit pack in accordance with the appropriate
procedure from 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module
Replacement:
Removing and installing a 5400 Switch fan assembly
Remove and install 5430 Switch CTM
Remove and install 5410 Switch CTM
Removing and installing a 5400 Switch module
Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP
Removing and installing a 5400 Switch line module
Removing and installing a 5430 Switch display module
Removing and installing a 5430 Switch I/O module
Removing and installing a 5410 Switch I/O module
—continued—
Step Action
10 Verify that Circuit pack over temperature alarm cleared at the Node Manager
workstation.
ATTENTION
It may take up to one hour for the temperature to stabilize and the alarm to
clear.
Procedure 2-78
In loopback condition
Category: Communication
The Loopback Mode warning is raised whenever a CTP, GTP, or PTP is in the
loopback mode. The loopback mode warning clears when a loopback is
disabled on a CTP, GTP, or PTP.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
condition, and note the port that displays the In loopback condition warning.
3 Click Go > Configuring > Ptp.
4 Select the port displaying the alarm.
5 Select the Basic tab.
6 In the Parameter section, select None from Loopback type drop down menu.
7 Click Accept.
8 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-79
In loopback mode
Category: Communication
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
condition, and note the TTP that displays the In loopback mode warning.
3 Click Go > Configuring > Trail TTPs and select the TTP.
4 Select the Basic tab.
5 Select None from Loopback type drop down menu.
6 Click Accept.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-80
Input power fuse
Category: Equipment
TL1 String: FA
An Input Power Fuse is raised when the primary control module detects a
fuse/breaker in an open/tripped state.
An Input Power Fuse is cleared when the primary control module no longer
sees a fuse/breaker in an open/tripped state for a period of 10 seconds.
Step Action
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab. Select the
alarm, and note the module reporting the alarm and note any additional
power related problems or probable cause information.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-81
Intrusion detection
Category: Alert
The Intrusion Detection condition applies to all user accounts (including the
superuser account) locked when the max number of login attempts is
exceeded.
Procedure 2-82
Last authentication key expired
Category: Communication
NM Probable Cause:
NM Additional Text: Expired accept key still used as no other key active for
generate.
Condition Description:
The system generates the condition for last key timed out when the accept
stop time or generate stop time expire for the last available key for the
interface.
This condition is cleared, when the “accept stop time” and “generate stop
time” both have configured values greater than the current time, the
associated key is deleted, or a new key is configured and enabled for current
use.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
Last authentication key expired alarm.
3 Click Go > provisioning > OSPF and select the Subtended neighbor tab.
4 Click the MD5Key Data Tab and the Add/Remove MD5 Keys dialog box is
displayed.
5 Verify that the “accept stop time” and “generate stop time” both have
configured values greater than the current time.
6 Click Close.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-83
LAPS automatic switch to protect
Category: Communication
NM Additional Text:
ATTENTION
This Ciena requirement supersedes GR-474 R8-34 [397], R8-36 [399]
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
LAPS automatic switch to protect alarm, and note the port that displays the
automatic switchover condition.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed port is displayed and verify that no
equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
4 Check the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream LTE or
MSTE is another 5400 Switch or CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a
network drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The
far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser should be checked for the following:
• Port and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace the port, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace port SFP/XFP/CFP or equivalent with correct
rate, wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a
transmit 5400 Switch port, expand the Node Manager configuration tree,
select the Physical TP and Basic tabs, and ensure that the provisioned
optical rate is correct. Always lock the port before correcting and unlock
when completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port or
equivalent.)
• The output level of the laser (Node Manager PRTP Physical tab) should
be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform System Description. (Corrective action: clean the
transmit port or equivalent fiber connector, replace the port or equivalent,
and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400 Switch technology.)
The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of the
other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if other
technology) may be defective.
If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical multiplexer tests bad,
repair in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to step 25.
—continued—
Step Action
If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical multiplexer tests good,
go to step 5.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Remove the alarmed port receive fiber. If required, refer to 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Commissioning and Testing. Insert the receive fiber into a
test set capable of reading bit errors and light level.
6 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 7.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 18.
7 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices and reinsert receive fiber into test set.
8 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 9.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 22.
9 The received light level should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description. Verify
that the received light level is within specification.
10 If the received light level is within specification, go to step 16.
• If the received light level is not within specification, go to step 11.
—continued—
Step Action
11 Determine if there one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit LTE or MSTE checked in step 4 and the receive LTE or
MSTE in alarm).
• If there are no WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 12.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 14.
12 The output of the far end upstream LTE or MSTE was previously tested in
step 4. The low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty
or defective fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit LTE or
MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or MSTE. Isolate and clean/repair the
fiber or connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
13 Determine if a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired in
step 14.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired in step
12, go to step 14.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired in
step 12, go to step 27.
14 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch port in alarm. Correct any problems that are found.
15 Determine if any problems were isolated and corrected in step 14.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected in step 14, go to step 16.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected in step 14, go to step 27.
16 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit LTE or MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or
MSTE in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
17 Determine if any problems were isolated and corrected in step 16.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected in step 16, go to step 18.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected in step 16, go to step 27.
—continued—
Step Action
18 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
and Equipment Safety Practices.
19 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
20 Under the Go > Configuration menu, select the Physical TP and Basic
tabs.
21 View the Configured Rate box and ensure that the correct optical rate is
selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 22.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
22 Reconnect the receive fiber, then reinstall the port in accordance with the
procedure titled “Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP” in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
23 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 24.
24 Replace the port with a shelf spare. If required, refer to the procedure titled
“Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP” in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement. Then go to step 27.
25 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 27.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to step 26.
26 Reconnect the receive fiber, then reinstall the port. If required, refer to the
procedure titled “Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP” in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
27 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-84
LAPS channel mismatch
Category: Communication
The channel mismatch failure is raised if the channel mismatch defect persists
for 2.5 (± 0.5) seconds and clears when the channel mismatch defect is
absent for 10 (± 0.5) seconds.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
LAPS channel mismatch alarm, and note the port that displays the warning,
the source name, and additional information.
—continued—
Step Action
3 Note the local and far end configuration parameters. If the configuration
parameters need to be changed on the terminating end point, log on to the
appropriate node and repeat this step.
4 Change the configuration parameters to match the local or far end as
required.
5 Click Accept.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-85
LAPS far end protection line failure
Category: Communication
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LAPS far end protection line failure
warning, the source name, and additional information.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
3 Note and clear any LAPS faults.
4 Protect Line Failure.
5 Verify that the alarm clears.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-86
LAPS forced switch to protect
Category: Service report
NM Additional Text:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LAPS forced switch to protect
warning.
3 Under the Go > Protection > Line Level > APS/MSP > APS (or MSP) Group
tab, select the APS or MSP group identified in step 2.
4 Click Administer. The Administer Group dialog box opens. In the table, click
the working line to be cleared.
5 In the Operations group box, select Forced or Manual from the Switch Type
drop-down list.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-87
LAPS forced switch to working
Category: Service report
NM Additional Text:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LAPS forced switch to working
warning.
3 Under the Go > Protection > Line Level > APS/MSP > APS (or MSP) Group
tab, select the APS or MSP group identified in step 2.
4 Click Administer. The Administer Group dialog box opens. In the table, click
the working line to be cleared.
5 In the Operations group box, select Forced or Manual from the Switch Type
drop-down list.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-88
LAPS invalid APS mode
Category: Communication
NM Additional Text:
LTE monitors the mode of operation indicators in the incoming K2 byte for
invalid APS Modes. An invalid mode condition is raised when five consecutive
samples (which may or may not be consecutive frames) contain '000', '001',
'010' or '011' in bits 6 through 8 of K2. An invalid mode clears when five
consecutive samples (which may or may not be consecutive frames) contain
'100' or '101' in bits 6 through 8 of K2. This defect is not cleared when an
associated AIS-L or RDI-L exists.
The invalid mode condition is raised if the invalid mode condition persists for
2.5 (± 0.5) seconds and clears when the invalid mode condition is absent for
10 (± 0.5) seconds.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LAPS invalid APS mode warning,
the source name, and additional information.
3 Note the local and far end configuration parameters. If the configuration
parameters need to be changed on the terminating end point, log on to the
appropriate node and repeat this step.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the downstream far end LTE (in accordance with the guidelines of the
downstream LTE technology) to verify that the LTE is sending valid APS
modes in the K2 byte.
5 Verify that the alarm clears.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-89
LAPS lockout of protection
Category: Service report
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LAPS lockout of protection warning.
3 From the list under the Go > Protection > Line Level > APS/MSP > APS (or
MSP) Group tab, select the APS or MSP group identified in step 2.
4 Click the Administer button.
5 Choose the locked out protection line.
6 Click the Release Protection button.
7 Click Accept.
8 Select the Traffic Flow tab.
9 Ensure that the working line is No Request and the protect line is Idle.
10 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-90
LAPS lockout of working
Category: Service report
NM Additional Text:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LAPS lockout of working warning.
3 From the list under the Go > Protection > Line Level > APS/MSP > APS (or
MSP) Group tab, select the APS or MSP group identified in step 2.
4 Click the Administer button.
5 Choose the locked out working line.
6 Click the Release Protection button.
7 Click Accept.
8 Select the Traffic Flow tab.
9 Ensure that the working line is No Request and the protect line is Idle and
end this procedure.
10 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-91
LAPS manual switch to protect
Category: Service report
NM Additional Text:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LAPS manual switch to protect
warning.
3 Under the Go > Protection > Line Level > APS/MSP > APS (or MSP) Group
tab, select the APS or MSP group identified in step 2.
4 Click Administer. The Administer Group dialog box opens. In the table, click
the working line to be cleared.
5 In the Operations group box, select Forced or Manual from the Switch Type
drop-down list.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-92
LAPS manual switch to working
Category: Service report
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LAPS manual switch to working
warning.
3 Under the Go > Protection > Line Level > APS/MSP > APS (or MSP) Group
tab, select the APS or MSP group identified in step 2.
4 Click Administer. The Administer Group dialog box opens. In the table, click
the working line to be cleared.
5 In the Operations group box, select Forced or Manual from the Switch Type
drop-down list.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-93
LAPS mode mismatch
Category: Communication
LTE monitors the mode of operation indicators in the incoming K2 byte for APS
Mode Mismatch failures, unless working in a 1+1 unidirectional mode. A
mismatch occurs when LTE configured for 1+1 receives an indication from a
far end LTE that is configured for 1:N or vice versa, or when an LTE configured
for bidirectional switching receives an indication from a far end LTE that is
configured for unidirectional switching or vice versa. This defect is not raised
or cleared when an associated AIS-L exists.
The mode mismatch failure is raised if the mode mismatch defect persists for
2.5 (± 0.5) seconds and clears when the mode mismatch defect is absent for
10 (± 0.5) seconds.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
LAPS mode mismatch alarm, and note the port that displays the warning, the
source name, and additional information.
3 Note the local and far end configuration parameters. If the configuration
parameters need to be changed on the terminating end point, log on to the
appropriate node and repeat this step.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Change the configuration parameters to match the local or far end as required
then click Accept.
5 Verify that the alarm clears.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-94
LAPS protection switch byte failure
Category: Communication
The LTE monitors the K1 Protection Switching byte for failure. A defect is
declared if an Inconsistent Code (no 3 consecutive bytes are the same in the
past 12 bytes) or an Invalid Code (non-defined) is received for three
consecutive frames.
A Protection Switch Byte Failure is raised if the defect persists for 2.5 seconds
and clears when the defect is absent for 10 (± 0.5) seconds. This defect is
not raised or cleared when an associated AIS-L exists.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
LAPS protection switch byte failure alarm, and note the port that displays the
warning, the source name, and additional information.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
—continued—
Step Action
3 Check the downstream far end LTE Receiver (in accordance with the
guidelines of the downstream LTE technology) to identify any Receiver
equipment failure alarms, Near End APS alarms, or incoming line facility
defect alarms.
• If no Receiver equipment failure alarms, Near End APS alarms, or
incoming line facility defect alarms are present on the downstream LTE,
go to the next step.
• If any Receiver equipment failure alarms, Near End APS alarms, or
incoming line facility defect alarms are present on the downstream LTE,
discontinue this procedure and clear the noted equipment or facility
defect alarm in accordance with the downstream technology guidelines.
4 Verify that the alarm clears.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-95
Laser frequency out of range
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
Procedure 2-96
LCH
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The LCH alarm is raised when the received optical power for the provisioned
optical channel is below the LOS threshold.
The LCH alarm clears when the received optical power for the provisioned
optical channel is 1.0 dBm above the LOS threshold.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LCH alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify that
no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Verify that the received light level at the provisioned wavelength is within
specification, in accordance with interface Specifications listed in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform System Description. Because this interface may
contain multiple wavelengths, the wavelength received light level must be
verified with an Optical Spectrum Analyzer.
• If the received light level is within specification, go to step 6.
• If the received light level is not within specification, go to step 5.
5 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
& Equipment Safety Practices.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-97
Line Flapping
Category: Communication
The line flapping alarm is used to identify when a line goes in and out of failure
multiple times within a specified time. This feature counts multiple line failure
occurrences within a user defined window and reports it as an alarm after a
certain defined threshold is reached. For example: three line failures [any
combination of LOS/LOF/AIS-L] detected within 300 seconds triggers a Line
Flapping Alarm. The alarm automatically clears when the line is error free for
a user defined period of seconds.
The following ODUkT TCMi layer defects shall declare a 'line down' and be
used to count line failure(s):
• SSF
— dLOS
— dLOF
— dLOM
— dLOL
— OTUk dAIS
• TCM dAIS
• TCM dLOF
• TCM dOCI
• TCM dLCK
• TCM dLTC (with consequent actions enabled)
• TCM dTIM (with consequent actions enabled)
• Mesh on Sustained DEG
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Check the facility for problems which cause intermittent failures.
3 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-98
LOC
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The LOC alarm is raised when is raised when the measured frequency of the
input client clock exceeds the allowed frequency deviation outlined by the
corresponding standard or when the provisioned line rate at the far-end circuit
pack does not match the line port rate at the near-end circuit pack.
The LCH alarm clears when the incoming clock of the OTU payload is
recovered.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LOC alarm.
3 Ensure the subtending equipment is working properly and providing an error-
free signal that meets the allowed frequency deviation specifications.
4 Ensure that all of the optical fibers between the subtending equipment Tx port
and the Rx port are correctly connected.
5 Ensure that the line rate or the client type is the same for both ends of the link.
—continued—
Step Action
6 Use an optical power meter to measure the received power level at the Rx
port of the alarmed circuit pack. Verify if the Rx power level is within the
operational threshold. Record the value.
7 Use a cleaning kit to clean all the connectors between the subtending
equipment Tx port and the alarmed Rx port.
8 Record the operating power level after cleaning each connector and compare
it to the value recorded in step 6.
• If the original alarm has cleared then go to step 10.
• If the original alarm exist then go to step 9.
9 Warm restart the alarmed circuit pack.
10 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-99
LOF
Category: Communication
Unless a LOS defect is also present, an LOF alarm is declared when an LOF
defect persists for 2.5 (±0.5) seconds and an LOS alarm is not present (LOF
is inhibited when LOS is declared). If the LOS clears and the LOF conditions
are still present, the LOF alarm is declared.
An LOF alarm clears when the LOF defect is absent for 10 (± 0.5) seconds.
ATTENTION
The alarm cause information reflects the conditions at the time the failure
occurred.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LOF alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
3 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify that
no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
4 Check the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch network, the upstream LTE or MSTE is another 5400
Switch. If the line in alarm is a network drop, the upstream technology is
typically an Aggregator/MUX. The far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser
should be checked for the following:
• SFP/XFP/CFP and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment
failures or Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective
action: replace SFP/XFP/CFP, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace/provision SFP/XFP/CFP with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch port, select the port, expand the Node Manager
configuration tree, click Go > Inventory and select the Basic tab, then
ensure that the provisioned optical rate is correct. Always lock the port
before correcting and unlock when completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit port fiber connector, replace the
SFP/XFP/CFP, and/or correct improper Line Build Out (LBO) if not a 5400
Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical multiplexer tests bad,
repair in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to
step 21.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical multiplexer test
good, go to step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
Step Action
10 Determine if there are one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit LTE or MSTE checked in step 4 and the Receive LTE
or MSTE in alarm).
• If there are no WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 11.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 12.
11 The output of the far end upstream LTE or MSTE was previously tested in
step 4. The low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty
or defective fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit LTE or
MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or MSTE. Isolate and clean/repair the
fiber or connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired, go to
step 21.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired, go
to step 23.
12 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch port in alarm. Correct any problems that are found.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 21.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 23.
13 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit LTE or MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or
MSTE in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 21.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 23.
14 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
& Equipment Safety Practices.
15 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
—continued—
Step Action
16 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree to the
port in alarm.
17 Click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs and ensure that the provisioned optical
rate is correct by viewing the list frame Rate to ensure that the correct optical
rate is selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 18.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
18 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP/XFP/CFP in
accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
19 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 20.
20 Replace the module and then go to step 23.
21 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level that is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level that is out of
specification, go to step 23.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level that is out of
specification, go to
step 22.
22 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP/XFP/CFP in
accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
23 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-100
LOP
Category: Communication
Default Severity: Dynamic - MN/NSA for ports with protected status, or CR/
SA for ports with unprotected status.
An LOP (LOP) is declared when a valid pointer is not discovered for between
8<N<10 consecutive frames or when there are N consecutive frames with
New Data Flags (NDFs) set. An LOP alarm is raised if an LOF defect condition
persists for 2.5 seconds.
The 5400 Switch reports LOP for line side SNC CTPs. The SNC CTP alarms
are critical and service affecting. All other CTPs are not reported and non
service affecting.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LOP alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed port is displayed and verify that no
equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the status of the PTE or LTE or MSTE connected to the port to ensure
that the payload mapping matches the SNC/XCON payload mapping.
• If the payload mapping matches, go to step 5.
• If the payload mapping does not match, go to step 6.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Remove the port receive fiber and connect the fiber to a SONET test set.
Determine if a LOP is incoming.
• If the test set reports an incoming LOP, the trouble is external. Isolate and
repair the upstream fiber or connector problem before proceeding to step
6. Consult the next level of support if needed.
• If the test set does not report an incoming LOP, go to step 6.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-101
Loss of multi-frame indication
Category: Communication
This alarm applies only to ODU4, specifically the OPU4 multi frame alignment
process. LOOMFI alarm is raised as a result of an incorrectly mapped OPU
payload, where the payload is multiplexed ODUjs.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab.
3 Select the alarm, and note the port that displays the "loss of multiframe
indication" alarm.
4 Inspect the upstream equipment performing the ODUk/ODUj mapping, and
re-configure, replace, or repair the equipment in such a way that it complies
with the ITU-T G.798 ODUkP/ODUj-21 standard mapping process.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-102
Loss of lane alignment
Category: Communication
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab.
3 Select the alarm, and note the port that displays the "Loss of lane alignment"
alarm.
4 Inspect far end client equipment configuration and operational state and
perform any required configuration changes or repairs.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-103
Loss of PCS
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
A 10Gbe or 40GbE Ethernet client will raise the Loss of PCS-Out alarm when
a 1024B/1027B to 64B/66B trans-decoding failure is detected in the egress
Transcoding ODUk/40GbE adaptation source function.
ATTENTION
The alarm cause information reflects the conditions at the time the failure
occurred.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the Loss of PCS alarm.
3 Trace the remote end of the circuit/SNC and verify that remote Ethernet port
is 40GBE and the mapping used is PCS_TRANSPARENT
4 Verify the tunnel Peer of the above TETTP which is ODU CTP has the
payload set to PCS_TRANPARENT(0x07).
5 Correcting the above condition clears the issue.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-104
LOS
Category: Communication
A Loss of Signal (LOS) alarm is declared when the LOS defect persists for 2.5
(±0.5) seconds or an LOS defect is present when the conditions for declaring
an LOF failure are also met (LOF is inhibited when LOS is declared). The LOS
alarm is cleared when the line recovers or the port is admin locked.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the LOS alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed port is displayed and verify that no
equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch network, the upstream LTE or MSTE is another 5400
Switch. If the line in alarm is a network drop, the upstream technology is
typically an Aggregator/MUX. The far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser
should be checked for the following:
• SFP/XFP/CFP and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment
failures or Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective
action: replace SFP/XFP/CFP, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace/provision SFP/XFP/CFP with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch port, expand the Node Manager configuration tree and
select the port, click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs and ensure that the
provisioned optical rate is correct by viewing the list frame Rate. Always
lock the port before correcting and unlock when completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit SFP/XFP/CFP fiber connector,
replace the SFP/XFP/CFP, and/or correct improper Line Build Out (LBO)
if not a 5400 Switch technology.)
The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of the
other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if other
technology) may be defective.
If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical multiplexer tests bad,
repair in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to step 26.
If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical multiplexer test good,
go to step 5.
—continued—
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Remove the receive fiber and insert the receive fiber into a test set capable
of reading bit errors, as well as light level.
6 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If the test set reported bit errors, go to step 7.
• If the test set did not report bit errors, go to step 17.
7 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices, and reinsert receive fiber into the test set.
8 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If the test set reported bit errors, go to step 9.
• If the test set did not report bit errors, go to step 23.
9 The received light level should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description. Verify
that the received light level is within specification.
• If the received light level is within specification, go to step 15.
• If the received light level is not within specification, go to step 10.
—continued—
Step Action
10 Determine if there one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit LTE or MSTE checked in step 4 and the Receive LTE
or MSTE in alarm).
• If no WDM line systems were in the upstream path, go to step 11.
• If any WDM line systems were in the upstream path, go to step 13.
11 The output of the far end upstream LTE or MSTE was previously tested in
step 4. The low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty
or defective fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit LTE or
MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or MSTE. Isolate and clean/repair the
fiber or connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
12 Determine if a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired in
step 11.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired in step
11, go to step 26.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors was cleaned or repaired in
step 11, go to step 28.
13 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch port in alarm. Correct any problems that are found.
14 Determine if any problems were isolated and corrected in step 13.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected in step 13, go to step 26.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected in step 13, go to step 28.
15 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit LTE or MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or
MSTE in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
16 Determine if any problems were isolated and corrected in step 15.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected in step 15, go to step 26.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected in step 15, go to step 28.
17 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
& Equipment Safety Practices.
—continued—
Step Action
18 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
19 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree and
select the port in alarm.
20 Click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs.
21 View the Configured Rate box and ensure that the correct optical rate is
selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 22.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
22 Select the Basic tab.
23 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP/XFP/CFP in
accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
24 Verify that the alarm cleared at the Node Manager workstation.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 25.
25 Replace the module then go to step 28.
26 If required, reinsert the fiber from the test set then determine if the test set is
reporting bit errors or a light level is not within specification defined in SFP/
XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System
Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 28.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to
step 27.
27 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP/XFP/CFP in
accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
28 If required, reinsert the fiber from the test set then verify that the alarm
cleared at the Node Manager workstation.
29 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-105
LSC
Category: Communication
The CBR LSC alarm is raised when a dLSC defect persists for 2.5 (±0.5)
seconds.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the NE that displays the LSC alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify that
no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch network, the upstream LTE or MSTE is another 5400
Switch. If the line in alarm is a network drop, the upstream technology is
typically an Aggregator/MUX. The far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser
should be checked for the following:
• SFP/XFP/CFP and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment
failures or Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective
action: replace SFP/XFP/CFP, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace/provision SFP/XFP/CFP with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch port, select the port, expand the Node Manager
configuration tree, click Go > Inventory and select the Basic tab, then
ensure that the provisioned optical rate is correct. Always lock the port
before correcting and unlock when completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit port fiber connector, replace the
SFP/XFP/CFP, and/or correct improper Line Build Out (LBO) if not a 5400
Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical multiplexer tests bad,
repair in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to
step 21.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical multiplexer test
good, go to step 5.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
Step Action
11 The output of the far end upstream LTE or MSTE was previously tested in
step 4. The low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty
or defective fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit LTE or
MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or MSTE. Isolate and clean/repair the
fiber or connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired, go to
step 21.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired, go
to step 23.
12 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch port in alarm. Correct any problems that are found.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 21.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 23.
13 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit LTE or MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or
MSTE in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 21.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 23.
14 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
& Equipment Safety Practices.
15 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
16 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree to the
port in alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
17 Click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs and ensure that the provisioned optical
rate is correct by viewing the list frame Rate to ensure that the correct optical
rate is selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 18.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
18 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP/XFP/CFP in
accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
19 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 20.
20 Replace the module and then go to step 23.
21 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level that is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications listed in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level that is out of
specification, go to step 23.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level that is out of
specification, go to
step 22.
22 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP/XFP/CFP in
accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
23 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-106
Maximum discovered route limit reached
Category: Communication
This condition is raised when the size of the forwarding table reaches the
maximum number of routes as defined in the Performance Section.
The condition is cleared when the size of the forwarding table reaches 95% of
the maximum number of routes as defined in the Performance Section.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab.
3 Select the Maximum discovered route limit reached alarm, and note the
number of configured routes and maximum routes from the alarm additional
info text. To clear the condition, the number of configured routes need to be
less than or equal to 95% of the maximum routes.
4 Disable OSPF with some of the neighbors which have alternate path in the
network.
If a directly subtended neighbor a.b.c.d is also reachable via another
subtended neighbor x.y.z.w, then disable OSPF for the subtended neighbor
a.b.c.d.
5 Click OSPF and select the Subtended Neighbor Tab and uncheck the Ospf
enabled Check box.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-107
NDP configuration mismatch condition
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
This condition for Configuration Mismatch is raised when multiple NDP links
to the same subtended neighbor have different discovered destinations.
1 Verify that multiple NDP links to the same subtended neighbor have the
same discovered destinations.
2 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-108
NDP adjacency down
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
This condition is raised when neighbor connectivity over a TTP that is enabled
for NDP over GCC is lost. The condition is not raised if the TTP already has
an alarm, or the TTP is locked, or the PTP is locked.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab and note
the port that displays the NDP adjacency down condition.
3 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify that
no equipment alarms exist. If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this
procedure and perform the TCP for the alarmed equipment.
4 Ensure that the alarmed port e is alarm free at the OTU layer. If an OTU layer
alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform TCP for the OTU alarm.
5 Ensure that the OTN FEC type matches at both the endpoints.
6 Go > Configuring > Trail TPs > OTN TTPs > OTU TTPs and select the
relevant TTP.
7 Select the Basic tab and change the Admin State to locked.
8 Select the FEC type to match the remote endpoint FEC type
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-109
NDP duplicate subtended neighbor condition
Category: Communication
The alarm is raised when multiple SN profiles are configured for the same
remote node.
Procedure 2-110
Network configuration changes inhibited
Category: Service report
NM Additional Text:
The Network Config Changes Inhibited condition is raised when the node
cannot configure the data path for new or changed cross-connections due to
an LM control plane reset and time is needed until configuration changes can
once again be made. When the node successfully configures the data path for
the previously blocked change request, the warning is cleared automatically.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the LM that displays the Network configuration changes
inhibited condition.
3 Observe that the warning clears within five minutes.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-111
Nodes per area exceeded
Category: OSI Communication
The alarm is raised if any one of the current count of nodes, maintained in the
mCurNodesPerArea parameter for a given area is greater than the configured
value in the mCnfNodesPerArea parameter for that area.
ATTENTION
There can be up to three areas, each of max. size 512 nodes; the Nodes per
Area Alarm is raised if any one area exceeds to the configured value in the
mCnfNodesPerArea parameter for that area.
ATTENTION
There can be up to three areas, each of max. size 512 nodes; an alarm is
cleared if all three areas have the number nodes per area falls below the
mCnfNodesPerArea parameter for that area.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm that displays the source as OSIBASIC and probable cause as Nodes
Per Area Exceeded condition.
3 Click Go > Provisioning > OSI and select the General Settings tab and
increase the value of Nodes in the Nodes Per Area field.
4 Verify that the alarm has cleared. If the alarm has not cleared then go to step
5.
5 Check the value of Area Prefix of all the nodes in the network (where OSI is
enabled) to verify the number of nodes in a particular area does not exceed
the configured value.
6 Verify that the alarm has cleared. If the alarm has not cleared then go to step
7.
7 From the CLI Maintenance Menu, disable the OSI and reboot the Primary
CTM.
8 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-112
NTP server connection failed
Category: Communication
NM Probable Cause:
Condition Description:
The alarm is raised if/when the Node is unable to communicate with any of the
provisioned NTP servers.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab.
3 Select the alarm that displays the NTP server connection failed alarm.
4 Log in to the Maintenance CLI by connecting a Telnet session to the Node's
DCN IP Address.
—continued—
Step Action
5 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Maintenance Menu, type
the number to select the Modify system configuration option, and then
press Enter to select the Node Settings menu.
6 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the Node Settings menu, type
the number to select the NTP Settings Menu option, and then press Enter
to select the NTP Settings menu.
7 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Settings menu, type
the number to select the NTP Server Settings Menu option, and then press
Enter to select the NTP Server menu.
8 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Server menu, type the
number to select the Get server status option, and then press Enter to get
the latest connection status.
9 If all servers show “Init” in the NTP status column, wait approximately one
minute. Then, at the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Server
menu, type the number to select the Get server status option, and then
press Enter to get the latest connection status once again. If all servers do
not show “Init” in the NTP status column, proceed to step 21.
10 If all servers persist in the “Init” state, it is possible that the underlying NTP
client did not start correctly. To restart the client, follow this procedure:
11 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Server menu, type the
number to select the Return to previous menu option, and then press Enter
to select the NTP Settings menu.
12 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Settings menu, type
the number to select the Enable/Disable External NTP Support option, and
then press Enter.
13 Enter "disable".
14 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Settings menu, type
the number to select the Commit pending NTP configuration option, and
then press Enter. This will temporarily clear the alarm.
15 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Settings menu, type
the number to select the Enable/Disable External NTP Support option, and
then press Enter.
16 Enter "enable".
17 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Settings menu, type
the number to select the Commit pending NTP configuration option, and
then press Enter.
18 Wait approximately two minutes. Then, at the “Enter Choice” prompt at the
bottom of the NTP Settings menu, type the number to select the NTP Server
Settings Menu option, and then press Enter to select the NTP Server menu.
—continued—
Step Action
19 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Server menu, type the
number to select the Get server status option, and then press Enter to force
the status information to refresh.
20 If the NTP Status column shows “Connected” or “Synced” for any server, the
alarm will remain cleared in Node Manager. If the alarm returns in Node
Manager during this step, proceed to the next step.
21 If any of the servers display “Failed” in the Auth Status column, then attempt
to fix the connection and clear the alarm using the following steps. If not,
proceed to step 33.
22 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Server menu, type the
number to select the Show settings for an individual server option, and
then press Enter. Then enter the IP Address of the server.
23 Verify that the “Key ID” in use matches the same “Key ID” used by that server.
If that information is not available, verify it against the available configuration
information.
24 If NTP Authentication is not intended to be enabled for this server, the “Key
ID” must be “0”.
25 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Server menu, type the
number to select the Return to previous menu option, and then press Enter
to return to the NTP Settings menu.
26 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Settings menu, type
the number to select the NTP Authentication Settings Menu option, and
then press Enter to display the NTP Authentication menu.
27 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Authentication menu,
type the number to select the Show a single KeyID option, and then press
Enter. Then enter the relevant “Key ID”. Verify that the authentication type
matches what is in use on the server.
28 For security reasons, the authentication key is not displayed in the MCLI. If at
this point no error is apparent, delete the key and then re-enter the key to
ensure it is correct. To delete and then re-enter the key, use the following NTP
Authentication menu options in the sequence shown:
• Delete an NTP Authentication Key
• Add a new KeyID
• Set Authentication Type
• Enter Authentication Key
29 If any configuration changes have been made, wait approximately one
minute. Then, at the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP
Authentication menu, type the number to select the Return to previous
menu option, and then press Enter to return to the NTP Settings menu.
—continued—
Step Action
30 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Settings menu, type
the number to select the NTP Server Settings Menu option, and then press
Enter to select the NTP Server menu.
31 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Server menu, type the
number to select the Get server status option, and then press Enter to force
the status alarms to refresh and see if the changes corrected the problem.
32 If the alarm persists, continue to the next step. If the alarm has cleared, make
sure to repeat these instructions for any other NTP servers with an Auth
Status of “Failed” to ensure optimal NTP operation.
33 At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Server menu, type the
number to select the Return to previous menu option, and then press Enter
to return to the NTP Settings menu. From here there are three different paths
to clear the alarm.
• Option 1. Disable the NTP Client feature, and apply the change. To
disable the NTP Client feature, proceed as follows. At the “Enter Choice”
prompt at the bottom of the NTP Settings menu, type the number to select
the Enable/Disable External NTP Support option, and then press
Enter. Then enter “disable”. To apply the change, proceed as follows.
At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Settings menu,
type the number to select the Commit pending NTP configuration
option, and then press Enter.
• Option 2. Go to the NTP Server menu and use the options on that menu
to add a valid NTP server. To go to the NTP Server menu, proceed as
follows. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom of the NTP Settings
menu, type the number to select the NTP Server Settings Menu option,
and then press Enter. When you are on the NTP Server menu, you can
use the menu options to add a valid NTP server. The options for this can
vary based on the configuration of the server being added: please refer
to 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Administration and Security for
information on adding a NTP server.
• Option 3. Go to the NTP Server menu, and list all NTP servers. To go to
the NTP Server menu, proceed as follows. At the “Enter Choice” prompt
at the bottom of the NTP Settings menu, type the number to select the
NTP Server Settings Menu option, and then press Enter. To list all NTP
servers, proceed as follows. At the “Enter Choice” prompt at the bottom
of the NTP Server menu, type the number to select the List all NTP
servers option, and then press Enter.
—continued—
Step Action
34 Verify that all servers have been correctly configured. If it is determined that
all servers have been correctly configured but the alarm persists, the alarm
can be cleared by removing all configured NTP servers. To delete a
configured NTP server, use the Delete an NTP Server option on the NTP
Server menu.
35 If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
36 If the alarm did not clear, verify that the desired NTP servers are operational
and then contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-113
ODU AIS
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
When the 5400 Switch detects an ODU fault on an incoming signal or that a
trace mismatch alarm exists, the 5400 Switch generates an AIS on the
outgoing CTPs. When ODU AIS is detected on a TTP, a BDI signal is sent
back toward the peer to indicate that the 5400 Switch has detected an ODU
AIS or lower layer defect on the signal that the peer originated.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the ODU AIS alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
3 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify that
no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
ATTENTION
If a signal defect is isolated to the upstream node, check the upstream node
laser as indicated in step 4. When the root cause of the AIS alarm is isolated
and resolved, go to step 6.
• If the test set does not report incoming AIS or any other line signal defect,
go to step 5.
5 Reconnect fiber, reinstall OM, SFP/XFP/CFP, and recheck alarm status.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm still exists, go to step 6.
6 Replace the OM, SFP/XFP/CFP.
7 Verify that alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-114
ODU BDI
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
ODU BDI alarm, and note any additional port alarm information.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 3.
—continued—
Step Action
3 View the Current Alarms details screen and note any related Unavailable
(SNC) alarms.
• If an alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
Unavailable (SNC) alarm TCP.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, isolate the problem to the incoming
drop or the outgoing drop and perform the associated upstream or
downstream TCP.
4 Check the far end laser in accordance with upstream technology guidelines
for this line to identify the node that may be generating this alarm.
• If any alarms are reported, resolve or refer in accordance with internal
guidelines. When resolved, go to step 5.
• If no upstream alarm can be identified, go to step 5.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-115
ODU DEG
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
An ODU DEG alarm is raised when the number of errored blocks per second
exceeds the provisioned threshold.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the ODU DEG alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed port is displayed and verify that no
equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream LTE or
MSTE is another 5400 Switch or CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a
network drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The
far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser should be checked for the following:
— Port and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace the port, LM, or equivalent.)
— The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach),
and the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace port or equivalent with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch port, expand the Node Manager configuration tree, select
the Physical TP and Basic tabs, and ensure that the provisioned
optical rate is correct. Always lock the port before correcting and
unlock when completed.)
— The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port or
equivalent.)
— The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/
CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System
Description. (Corrective action: clean the transmit port or equivalent
fiber connector, replace the port or equivalent, and/or correct improper
LBO if not a 5400 Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical multiplexer tests bad,
repair in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to
step 24.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical multiplexer tests
good, go to step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Remove the alarmed port receive fiber. Insert the receive fiber into a test set
capable of reading bit errors and light level.
6 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 7.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 14.
7 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices and reinsert receive fiber into test set.
8 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 9.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 19.
9 The received light level should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description. Verify
that the received light level is within specification.
• If the received light level is within specification, go to step 13.
• If the received light level is not within specification, go to step 10.
—continued—
Step Action
10 Determine if there are one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit node checked in step 4 and the receive node in alarm).
• If there are no WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 11.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 12.
11 The output of the far end upstream node was previously tested in step 4. The
low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty or defective
fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit node and the
receive 5400 Switch node. Isolate and clean/repair the fiber or connector
trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired, go to
step 22.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired, go
to step 24.
12 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch port in alarm. Correct any problems that are found.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 22.
13 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit node and the receive 5400 Switch node in alarm in
accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking for higher rate
WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include checking any
fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and fibers and
connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output lasers from
one WDM system to another.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 22.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 24.
14 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
& Equipment Safety Practices.
15 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
16 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree to the
port in alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
17 Click Go > Configuring > Ptp and select the Basic tab.
18 View the Service Type box and ensure that the correct optical rate is
selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 19.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
19 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP in accordance
with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
20 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure. If the alarm did not clear, go to
step 21.
21 Replace the module, then go to step 24.
22 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications listed in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 24.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to step 23.
23 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP in accordance
with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
24 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-116
ODU LCK
Category: Communication
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the ODU LCK alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree in the upstream node, until the alarmed unit is
displayed and note the shelf and slot designation.
4 Click Go > Configuring > Ptp and select the Basic tab.
5 Select Unlocked from the Admin State drop-down menu and click Accept.
6 Verify the Admin State in the Status field indicates Unlocked. Click Accept.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-117
ODU LOF
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
An ODU LOF is raised when an ODU signal experiences loss of frame and
multiframe.
ATTENTION
The alarm cause information reflects the conditions at the time the failure
occurred.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the ODU LOF alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify that
no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream node laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream node is
another 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a network
drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The far end
upstream node laser should be checked for the following:
• OM and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace SFP/XFP/CFP, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace SFP/XFP/CFP with correct rate, wavelength,
and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit 5400 Switch/
CoreDirector Switch port, select the port, expand the Node Manager
configuration tree, click Go > Configuring and select the Physical TP
tab, then ensure that the provisioned optical rate is correct. Always lock
the port before correcting and unlock when completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit SFP/XFP/CFP fiber connector,
replace the SFP/XFP/CFP, and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400
Switch/CoreDirector Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream node laser or optical multiplexer tests bad, repair
in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to step 21.
• If the far end upstream node laser and optical multiplexer test good, go to
step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
Step Action
10 Determine if there are one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit node checked in step 4 and the Receive node in
alarm).
• If there are no WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 11.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 12.
11 The output of the far end upstream node was previously tested in step 4. The
low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty or defective
fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit node and the
receive 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch. Isolate and clean/repair the fiber or
connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired, go to
step 21.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired, go
to step 23.
12 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch OM or port in alarm. Correct any
problems that are found.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 21.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 23.
13 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit node and the receive 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch
node in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 21.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 23.
14 Clean the OM or port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard
Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices.
15 Check that the installed receive OM or port is the correct type (rate,
wavelength, and reach) by verifying the part number.
16 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree to the
OM or port in alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
17 Click Go > Configuring and select the Physical TP tab, then ensure that the
provisioned optical rate is correct by viewing the Configured Rate box to
ensure that the correct optical rate is selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 18.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
18 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the OM in accordance
with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
19 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 20.
20 Replace the module and then go to step 23.
21 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level that is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications listed in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level that is out of
specification, go to step 23.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level that is out of
specification, go to
step 22.
22 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the OM in accordance
with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
23 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-118
ODU OCI
Category: Communications
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the ODU OCI alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree in the upstream node, until the alarmed unit is
displayed and note the shelf and slot designation.
4 Click Go > Provisioning > Cross connect.
5 Verify that the cross connect is provisioned.
• If the cross connect is not provisioned then go to step 6.
• If the cross connect is provisioned then create cross connect.
6 From the cross connect screen select the New tab and provision the cross-
connect.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-119
ODU PLM
Category: Communications
Condition Description:
An ODU PLM alarm is raised when one of the following conditions exists:
• Ports are incorrectly connected
• Cross-connects are incorrectly created
• Expected payload type provisioned on the ODU TTP does not match the
received payload type
Step Action
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the ODU PLM alarm.
3 Verify the payload type is correct.
4 Click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs > OTN TTPs > ODU TTPs and select the
Basic tab.
—continued—
Step Action
5 Verify the Ex. Payload Type and Rx. Payload Type in the detail frame.
6 Check the connectivity to the upstream TTP and the client interface.
ATTENTION
ODU TTI message can be used to verify connectivity.
Procedure 2-120
ODU TIM
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
Default Severity:
• Warning, Non service affecting if Consequent Actions are Disabled.
• Minor, Non service affecting for ports with no cross-connection
provisioned, MN/NSA for ports with protected status, or CR/SA for ports
with unprotected status.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the ODU TIM alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
3 Verify that the node received trace string value matches the expected value
in the TTP section trace screen.
4 Correction of the condition from step 3 clears the alarm. If a condition did not
exist, the alarm clears within 30 seconds.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm clears, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-121
Operation out of spec
Category: Equipment
NM Additional Text:
Condition Description:
The warning is raised when a coherent optical interface detects that at least
one of the measurements, reach or PMD (Polarization Mode Dispersion) DGD
(differential group delay), exceeded the specifications of the circuit pack. Line
signal conditioning will be applied if the condition which caused this alarm to
be raised was present during optical signal acquisition (for example, after
connecting fiber, or after card insertion or cold restart operation). It is possible
for this alarm to be raised without impacting traffic, if traffic was already
running prior to the condition being detected. Actions must be taken to clear
this alarm as soon as possible.
The alarm is latched even if all measurements, reach or PMD DGD, do not
exceed the specifications of the circuit pack and does not get re-evaluated
until either a cold restart of the circuit pack or a line fault condition toggles (for
example: fiber pull and reinsertion).
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the Operation out of spec alarm.
3 Change the fiber or the environment the fiber is located.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-122
OPR channel out of range
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OPR channel out of range alarm.
3 Locate the receive port that is in alarm and use an attenuator to raise or lower
the power as needed.
Procedure 2-123
OPR channel power high
Category: Communication
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OPR channel power high alarm.
3 Locate the receive port that is in alarm and use an attenuator to lower the
power.
4 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-124
OPR out-of-range
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The warning is raised when the total optical power seen at the receiver is
outside the minimum and maximum receive optical power range.
The warning is cleared when the Rx power is within the minimum and
maximum receive optical power range.
Procedure 2-125
OPR power high
Category: Communication
Condition Description: The OPR power high refers to a grey optics or a WL2
modem port. The alarm is raised when the Rx power is above the maximum
receive optical power range defined for the interface.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OPR power high alarm.
3 Locate the receive port that is in alarm and use an attenuator to raise or lower
the power as needed.
4 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, replace the optic.
5 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-126
Optical trace mismatch (TR control)
Category: Communication
NM Probable Cause:
Condition Description:
The warning is raised when the TR control receives a TxID from the far-end
receiver that does not match its own TxID. This indicates a crossed fiber.
The warning is cleared when the TR control receives a TxID from the far-end
receiver that matches its own TxID, or when TR control receives no TxID from
the far-end receiver.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the Optical trace mismatch (TR control)
alarm.
3 Verify that the transmit and receive fibers are connected to the appropriate
ports.
4 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-127
OPU CSF
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
An OPU k CSF alarm is raised when the remote end client TETTP/CBR TTP/
TransSTTP has a client signal failure it sends the OPU CSF towards the near
end.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OPU CSF warning.
3 Trace the remote end of the circuit/SNC and go to the ODU CTP menu.
4 On the ODU CTP tab, click on TunnelPeer field. Node Manager should now
display the corresponding TETTP/CBR TTP/TransSTTP.
5 Verify the object is alarm free by clicking Go > Monitoring > Alarms &
Events Tab
6 Clearing any existing alarm on above object will clear the OPU CSF at the
near end.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-128
OPU MSI mismatch
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
An OPU-MSIM alarm is raised when an OPU layer MSIM defect persists for
2.5 (±0.5) seconds and clears when the defect is absent for 10 (±0.5)
seconds.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OPU MSI mismatch alarm.
3 Check the far end upstream ODU TTP timeslots configured is similar to the
timeslots configured in the node raising the alarm.
4 Ensure both nodes have identical timeslots configured.
5 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-129
OSI communications failure
Category: OSI Communication
The alarm is raised when the OSI link between two nodes (OSI is enabled on
both nodes) is down.
The alarm is cleared when the OSI link between two nodes are restored.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm that displays the OSI Communication failure condition.
3 Verify TTP operation state is normal by unlocking the PTP and TTP on both
the nodes and verifying correct fiber connectivity between them.
4 Verify that the alarm has cleared. If the alarm has not cleared then go to step
5.
5 Configure the correct LAPD parameters on the TTP of both nodes.
6 Verify that the alarm has cleared. If the alarm has not cleared then go to step
7.
7 From the Maintenance Menu, disable the OSI and reboot the Primary CTM.
8 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-130
OSPF adjacency down
Category: COMMUNICATION
Object Class:
This condition is raised when a neighbor that is enabled for OSPF is lost. The
condition is not raised if the TTP already has an alarm, or the TTP or PTP is
locked.
The condition is cleared when neighbor connectivity that is enabled for OSPF
is restored.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OSPF adjacency down warning.
3 Select Go > Provisioning > OSRP > OSRP Lines and select appropriate
port identified in step 2. Note the neighbor node name, supporting TP,
neighbor containing link ID.
4 Re-provision the OSPF link by referring to the 5400 Switch Node manager
User Guide.
5 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-131
OSPF backplane IP address conflict condition
Category: Reporting Event
Object Class:
This alarm is raised when a subtending RNE address is detected that conflicts
with the address space assigned to the 5400 backplane IP address space.
The condition is cleared when the node no longer detects an RNE address
that conflicts with the address space assigned to the 5400 backplane IP
address space.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the IP address of conflicting RNE.
3 At the conflicting RNE IP, change the IP Address.
4 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-132
OSRP advertised bandwidth mismatch condition
Category: Service report
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OSRP advertised bandwidth
mismatch condition warning.
3 Select Go > Provisioning > OSRP > OSRP Lines and select appropriate
port identified in step 2. Note the neighbor node name, supporting TP,
neighbor containing link ID.
4 Select Go > Provisioning > OSRP > OSRP Links.
5 In the list frame, select Local Links and then in the details frame, select Link.
6 Note the Advertised BW Limit.
7 Launch node manager on the remote node identified in step 3.
8 Select Go > Provisioning > OSRP > OSRP Links.
—continued—
Step Action
9 In the list frame, select Local Links and then in the details frame, select
Link.
10 Note the Advertised BW Limit.
11 verify that the Advertised BW Limit are consistent at both the local and
remote nodes.
12 Click Accept.
13 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-133
OSRP concatenation mismatch condition
Category: Service report
TL1 String:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OSRP concatenation mismatch
condition alarm. The alarm will contain the local and remote nodes and
associated ports.
3 Click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs > SONET/SDH TTPs, select the Basic
tab, and note concatenation status.
4 Launch Node Manager and establish a session with the remote node.
—continued—
Step Action
5 Click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs > SONET/SDH TTPs, select the Basic
tab, and note concatenation status.
• If transparent concatenation and flexible concatenation parameters are
consistent at both nodes then go to step 7.
6 Adjust concatenation as required at the remote or local node.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-134
OSRP CTP bandwidth locked
Category: Communications
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, and select
the alarm and note the port that displays OSRP CTP bandwidth locked alarm.
3 Click Go > Provisioning > OSRP Lines and note the Bandwidth Lockout
check box is ‘checked’ in the detail field.
4 Click Accept.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-135
OSRP CTP misconfigured bandwidth lockout
Category: Communications
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, and select
the alarm and note the port that displays OSRP CTP misconfigured
bandwidth lockout alarm.
3 Click Go > Provisioning > OSRP Lines and note the Bandwidth Lockout
check boxes in the detail field.
4 Launch Node Manager and establish a session with the remote node.
5 Click Go > Provisioning > OSRP Lines and note the Bandwidth Lockout
check boxes in the detail field.
6 Verify that both check boxes are consistent at both nodes.
7 Click Accept.
8 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-136
OSRP CTP misconfigured OVPN ID
Category: Communication
NM Probable Cause:
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab and note
the port that displays the OSRP CTP misconfigured OVPN ID warning.
3 Click Go > Provisioning > OSRP> OSRP Links, select the Local Links tab.
4 From the Local Links list, select the link in alarm.
5 In the Detail frame, note the OVPN ID in the Originating End Point and
Terminating End Point sections.
6 Verify that the OVPN ID values are not configured the same.
7 Click Accept.
8 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-137
OSRP link ID mismatch condition
Category: Communication
This alarm is generated due to Link ID Mismatch mismatch between local and
remote links.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OSRP link ID mismatch condition
alarm.
3 Select Go > Provisioning > OSRP > OSRP Lines and select appropriate
port identified in step 2. Note the neighbor node name, supporting TP,
neighbor containing link ID.
4 Select Go > Provisioning > OSRP > OSRP Links.
5 In the list frame, select Local Links and then in the details frame, select Link.
6 Compare the Link ID values in both the local and remote nodes and ensure
both are the same. Adjust if necessary.
7 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-138
OSRP LTP misconfigured BW thresholds
Category: Communications
Procedure 2-139
OSRP LTP oversubscribed
Category: Communications
Condition Description:
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, and select
the port that displays the OSRP LTP oversubscribed alarm.
3 Click Go > Provisioning > OSRP Links and select the Local Links tab.
4 Locate the SNCs which are using the RHP Priority, but are not in RHP Active
condition and note their originating node.
5 Launch Node Manager and establish a session with that node.
6 Click Go > Provisioning > OSRP Links and select the Local Links tab.
—continued—
Step Action
7 Locate the alarmed SNCs and move them to either their home path or new
path to clear the BW on the existing link.
8 Click Accept.
9 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-140
OSRP misconfigured admin state condition
Category: Service report
An Admin State Mismatch condition is raised on an OSRP line when the near
end and far end admin states are different and clears when admin states of
near end and far end OSRP lines are the same.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OSRP misconfigured admin state
condition alarm. The alarm will contain the local and remote nodes and
associated ports.
3 Compare the admin states in both the local and remote nodes to confirm
consistency.
4 Click Go > Configuring > Physical TPs, select the Basic tab, to verify admin
status.
• Set the Admin state at both nodes to be unlocked.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-141
OSRP misconfigured CID condition
Category: Service report
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OSRP misconfigured CID condition
alarm
3 Select Go > Provisioning > OSRP > OSRP Lines and select appropriate
port identified in step 2.
4 In the details frame, compare the local and neighbor Common Line ID.
5 Of the two, select the one that does not conform to the network design.
• If both CIDs conform to the network design, the design itself may be in
error.
—continued—
Step Action
6 On the node with the non-conforming at the Go > Provisioning > OSRP
Lines and from the OSRP Lines screen, select the OCTP with the
misconfigured CID from the List Frame.
7 Change Admin State to Unlocked and click Accept.
8 Change Common Line ID to correct value (valid range 1-65534) and click
Accept.
9 Change Admin State to Unlocked and click Accept.
10 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-142
OSRP misconfigured condition
Category: Service report
TL1 String:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OSRP misconfigured condition
alarm.
3 Select Go > Provisioning > OSRP > OSRP Lines and select appropriate
port identified in step 2. Note the neighbor node name, supporting TP,
neighbor containing link ID.
4 Select Go > Provisioning > OSRP > OSRP Links.
5 In the list frame, select Local Links and then in the details frame, select Link.
—continued—
Step Action
6 Compare the Bundle ID, Admin Weight, and Link ID values in both the local
and remote nodes and ensure both are the same. Adjust if necessary.
7 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-143
OSRP misconfigured node name condition
Category: Communication
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OSRP misconfigured node name
condition alarm.
3 Compare the LTPs and CTPs to the network design. Note both the Nodes and
LTP that the CTP should be associated with.
4 Expand the Equipment tree and select the appropriate port.
5 At Go > Configuring > Physical TPs and select the Basic tab, change the
Admin State to Locked to disable the laser.
6 Click Accept.
7 At Go > OSRP > OSRP Links and click appropriate LTP from List Frame,
click Add/Remove Lines.
8 At appropriate CTP from the Included Table and click Remove, click Apply.
—continued—
Step Action
9 Click Accept.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
10 Remove fiber from the current node and attach to correct node.
11 Expand the equipment tree and select appropriate port.
12 At Go > Configuring > Physical TPs and select the Basic tab, change
Admin State to Unlocked to enable laser.
13 Click Accept.
14 Repeat step 11 through step 13 for the other node.
15 Launch Node Manager and establish a session with the remote node.
16 From Go > Provisioning > OSRP > OSRP Links, select the appropriate LTP
from the list frame and click Add/Remove Lines.
17 Select the appropriate CTP from the Available Table and click Add.
18 Click Apply.
19 Click Accept.
20 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-144
OSRP OVPN ID mismatch conditions
Category: Communication
NM Probable Cause:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab and note
the port that displays the OSRP OVPN ID mismatch conditions warning.
3 Click Go > Provisioning > OSRP> OSRP Links, select the Local Links tab.
4 From the Local Links list, select the link in alarm.
5 In the Detail frame, note the OVPN ID in the Originating End Point and
Terminating End Point sections.
6 Verify that the OVPN ID values are not configured the same.
7 Click Accept.
8 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-145
OSRP port capability mismatch
Category: Service report
NM Additional Text: The capabilities of the near-end and far-end OSRP Line
ports are not compatible.
TL1 String:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab and note
the port that displays the OSRP port capability mismatch alarm.
3 Click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs > OTN TTPs > ODU TTPs.
4 Select the TTP in alarm and click the Basic tab.
5 In the detail frame verify the Payload Type.
6 Verify both ends of the OSRP line payloads are consistent.
7 Click Accept.
8 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-146
OSRP remote unreachable condition
Category: Communication
The OSRP Remote Unreachable alarm occurs when the OSRP LTP link
between two 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switches becomes unusable or when
OSRP is enabled on the near end of a link but not the far end. All other alarms,
warnings, alerts, and warnings associated with the CTPs on the aggregated
link will be cleared automatically before asserting this alarm. This alarm can
also be caused if a manually created far end OSRP CTP is deleted or if the far
end LM or CTM is rebooting. If the far end LM or CTM is rebooting, the alarm
clears within five minutes.
Step Action
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OSRP remote unreachable
condition alarm.
3 Select Go > Provisioning > OSRP > OSRP Lines and select appropriate
port identified in step 2. Note the neighbor node name, supporting TP,
neighbor containing link ID.
ATTENTION
If the information is not available or unknown, then the remote node
information must be determined before proceeding. Refer to the network
topology information and obtain the information before proceeding to step 4.
4 If remote node OSRP CTP was deleted or not created, launch node manager
on the remote node identified in step 3 and recreate the OSRP CTP then go
to step 11.
5 For OTN, select Go > Configuring > Trail TPs > OTN TTPs > OTU TTPs and
select the GCC tab for the desired port.
6 For SONET/SDH, select Go > Configuring > Trail TPs > SONET/SDH TTPs
and select the DCC tab for the desired port.
7 Note OSRP channel setting.
8 Launch node manager on the remote node identified in step 3.
9 Repeat step 5 or step 6 at the remote node.
10 Check OSRP channel setting for the desired port at the remote node.
11 Verify the OSRP channel settings are the same.
12 If the OSRP channel settings are not the same, make the desired changes
and click Accept.
13 Ensure the setting is the same at both ends of the link.
14 Verify that the alarm cleared on both the local and remote nodes.
• If alarm is cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-147
OTU AIS
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
An OTU AIS alarm is raised when a generic AIS signal is received on an OTU
TTP.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the OM or port that displays the OTU AIS alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
3 Expand the 5400 Switch equipment tree until the alarmed OM or port is
displayed and verify that no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
ATTENTION
If a signal defect is isolated to the upstream node, check the upstream node
laser as indicated in step 4. When the root cause of the AIS alarm is isolated
and resolved, go to step 6.
• If the test set does not report incoming AIS or any other line signal defect,
go to step 5.
5 Reconnect fiber, reinstall OM, SFP/XFP/CFP, and recheck alarm status.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm still exists, go to step 6.
6 Replace the OM, SFP/XFP/CFP.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-148
OTU BDI
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
OTU BDI alarm, and note any additional OM or port alarm information.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 3.
—continued—
Step Action
3 View the Current Alarms details screen and note any related Unavailable
(SNC) alarms.
• If an alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
Unavailable (SNC) alarm trouble clearing procedure.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, isolate the problem to the incoming
drop or the outgoing drop and perform the associated upstream or
downstream trouble clearing procedure.
4 Check the far end laser in accordance with upstream technology guidelines
for this line to identify the node that may be generating this alarm.
• If any alarms are reported, resolve or refer in accordance with internal
guidelines. When resolved, go to step 5.
• If no upstream alarm can be identified, go to step 5.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-149
OTU DEG
Category: Communication
An OTU DEG alarm is raised when the number of errored blocks per second
exceeds the provisioned threshold.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the OM or port that displays the OTU DEG alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed OM or port is displayed and verify
that no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream node laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream node is
another 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a network
drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The far end
upstream node laser should be checked for the following:
• OM and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace the OM, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace OM or equivalent with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch OM or port, expand the Node Manager
configuration tree and select the OM or port, click Go > Configuring >
Ptp and select the Basic tab, then ensure that the provisioned optical
rate is correct. Always lock the port before correcting and unlock when
completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the OM or
port.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications listed in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit OM or port fiber connector, replace
the OM or equivalent, and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400 Switch/
CoreDirector Switch technology.).
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream node laser or optical multiplexer tests bad, repair
in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to step 22.
• If the far end upstream node laser and optical multiplexer tests good, go
to step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
Step Action
10 Determine if there are one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit node checked in step 4 and the receive node in alarm).
• If there are no WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 11.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 12.
11 The output of the far end upstream node was previously tested in step 4. The
low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty or defective
fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit node and the
receive 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch. Isolate and clean/repair the fiber or
connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired, go to
step 22.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired, go
to step 24.
12 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch OM or port in alarm. Correct any
problems that are found.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 22.
13 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit node and the receive 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch
node in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 22.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 24.
14 Clean the OM or port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard
Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices.
15 Check that the installed receive OM or port is the correct type (rate,
wavelength, and reach) by verifying the part number.
16 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree to the
OM or port in alarm.
17 Click Go > Inventory and select the Physical TP tab.
—continued—
Step Action
18 View the Configured Rate box and ensure that the correct optical rate is
selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 19.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
19 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the OM in accordance
with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
20 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 21.
21 Replace the module, then go to step 22.
22 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 24.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to step 23.
23 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the OM or SFP in
accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
24 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-150
OTU LOF
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OTU LOF alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify that
no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream node laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream node is
another 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a network
drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The far end
upstream node laser should be checked for the following:
• SFP/XFP/CFP and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment
failures or Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective
action: replace SFP/XFP/CFP, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace SFP/XFP/CFP with correct rate, wavelength,
and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit 5400 Switch
port, select the port, expand the Node Manager configuration tree, click
Go > Inventory and select the Basic tab, then ensure that the
provisioned optical rate is correct. Always lock the port before correcting
and unlock when completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit SFP/XFP/CFP fiber connector,
replace the SFP/XFP/CFP, and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400
Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream node laser or optical multiplexer tests bad, repair
in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to step 21.
• If the far end upstream node laser and optical multiplexer test good, go to
step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Check if the service type of end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical
multiplexer is set to OTUk (k=1,2,3).
• If the upstream node is a 5400 Switch, select the remote transmitter port
and click Go > Configuration > ptp and select the basic tab to verify the
service type.
• If service type indicates OTUk (where k matches with the port
configuration of receive 5400 switch in alarm) go to next step. If not,
correct the service type in accordance with procedures listed in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, and
then go to step 24.
6 Remove the receive fiber in accordance with Removing, deleting or installing
an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management -
Module Replacement. Insert the receive fiber into a test set capable of
reading bit errors, as well as light level.
7 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 8.
• If no bit errors are reported, go to step 15.
8 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices and reinsert receive fiber into the test set.
—continued—
Step Action
Step Action
Procedure 2-151
OTU LOL
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The Loss of Lane Alignment failure is raised if the loss of lock defect persists
for 2.5 (± 0.5 seconds and clears when the loss of lock defect is absent for 10
(± 0.5) seconds.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the OTU LOL alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify that
no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream node laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream node is
another 5400 Switch. If the line in alarm is a network drop, the upstream
technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The far end upstream node laser
should be checked for the following:
— SFP/XFP/CFP and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment
failures or Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective
action: replace SFP/XFP/CFP, LM, or equivalent.)
— The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach),
and the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace SFP/XFP/CFP with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch port, select the port, expand the Node Manager
configuration tree, click Go > Inventory and select the Basic tab, then
ensure that the provisioned optical rate is correct. Always lock the port
before correcting and unlock when completed.)
— The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port.)
— The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/
CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System
Description. (Corrective action: clean the transmit SFP/XFP/CFP fiber
connector, replace the SFP/XFP/CFP, and/or correct improper LBO if
not a 5400 Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream node laser or optical multiplexer tests bad, repair
in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to step 21.
• If the far end upstream node laser and optical multiplexer test good, go to
step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Check if the service type of end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical
multiplexer is set to OTUk (k=1,2,3).
• If the upstream node is a 5400 Switch, select the remote transmitter port
and click Go > Configuration > ptp and select the basic tab to verify the
service type.
• If service type indicates OTUk (where k matches with the port
configuration of receive 5400 Switch in alarm) go to next step. If not,
correct the service type in accordance with procedures listed in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, and
then go to step 24.
6 Remove the receive fiber in accordance with Removing, deleting or installing
an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management -
Module Replacement. Insert the receive fiber into a test set capable of
reading bit errors, as well as light level.
7 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 8.
• If no bit errors are reported, go to step 15.
8 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices and reinsert receive fiber into the test set.
—continued—
Step Action
Step Action
Procedure 2-152
OTU PFSD
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The PFSD alarm appears when the FEC Error Correction process records a
number of corrected errors (total of 1's and 0's) above the threshold for
consecutive 1 second intervals. The threshold value is dependent on the FEC
error correction scheme as defined by the user.
The PFSD alarm clears when the number of Corrected FEC Errors remains
below the provisioned threshold value during the number of consecutive one
second windows defined by the user.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the OM or port that displays the OTU PFSD alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed OM or port is displayed and verify
that no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream node laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream node is
another 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a network
drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The far end
upstream node laser should be checked for the following:
• OM and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace the OM, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace OM or equivalent with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch OM or port, expand the Node Manager
configuration tree and select the OM or port, click Go > Configuring >
Ptp and select the Basic tab, then ensure that the provisioned optical
rate is correct. Always lock the port before correcting and unlock when
completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the OM or
port.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit OM or port fiber connector, replace
the OM or equivalent, and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400 Switch/
CoreDirector Switch technology.).
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream node laser or optical multiplexer tests bad, repair
in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to step 22.
• If the far end upstream node laser and optical multiplexer tests good, go
to step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
Step Action
10 Determine if there are one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit node checked in step 4 and the receive node in alarm).
• If there are no WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 11.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 14.
11 The output of the far end upstream node was previously tested in step 4. The
low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty or defective
fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit node and the
receive 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch. Isolate and clean/repair the fiber or
connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired, go to
step 22.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired, go
to step 24.
12 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch OM or port in alarm. Correct any
problems that are found.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 22.
13 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit node and the receive 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch
node in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 22.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 24.
14 Clean the OM or port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard
Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices.
15 Check that the installed receive OM or port is the correct type (rate,
wavelength, and reach) by verifying the part number.
16 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree to the
OM or port in alarm.
17 Click Go > Inventory and select the Physical TP tab.
—continued—
Step Action
18 View the Configured Rate box and ensure that the correct optical rate is
selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 19.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
19 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the OM in accordance
with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
20 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 21.
21 Replace the module, then go to step 22.
22 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 24.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to step 23.
23 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the OM or SFP/XFP/
CFP in accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in
5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
24 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-153
OTU PFSF
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The PFSF alarm is raised when number of Corrected FEC Errors remains
equal to or above the provisioned threshold value during the interval.
The PFSF alarm clears when number of Corrected FEC Errors remains below
the provisioned threshold value during the interval.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the OM or port that displays the OTU PFSF alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed OM or port is displayed and verify
that no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream node laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream node is
another 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a network
drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The far end
upstream node laser should be checked for the following:
• OM and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace the OM, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace OM or equivalent with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch OM or port, expand the Node Manager
configuration tree and select the OM or port, click Go > Configuring >
Ptp and select the Basic tab, then ensure that the provisioned optical
rate is correct. Always lock the port before correcting and unlock when
completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the OM or
port.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit OM or port fiber connector, replace
the OM or equivalent, and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400 Switch/
CoreDirector Switch technology.).
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream node laser or optical multiplexer tests bad, repair
in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to step 21.
• If the far end upstream node laser and optical multiplexer tests good, go
to step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
Step Action
9 Determine if there are one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit node checked in step 4 and the receive node in alarm).
• If there are no WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 10.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 13.
10 The output of the far end upstream node was previously tested in step 4. The
low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty or defective
fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit node and the
receive 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch. Isolate and clean/repair the fiber or
connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired, go to
step 21.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired, go
to step 23.
11 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch OM or port in alarm. Correct any
problems that are found.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 21.
12 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit node and the receive 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch
node in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 21.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 23.
13 Clean the OM or port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard
Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices.
14 Check that the installed receive OM or port is the correct type (rate,
wavelength, and reach) by verifying the part number.
15 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree to the
OM or port in alarm.
16 Click Go > Inventory and select the Physical TP tab.
—continued—
Step Action
17 View the Configured Rate box and ensure that the correct optical rate is
selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 18.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
18 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the OM in accordance
with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
19 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 20.
20 Replace the module, then go to step 21.
21 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 23.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to step 22.
22 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the OM or SFP/XFP/
CFP in accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in
5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
23 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-154
OTU TIM
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The node detects a OTU Trail Trace Mismatch (TTM) defect within 30 seconds
when none of the sampled 64 or 16-byte STS path trace strings match the
provisioned value.
ATTENTION
An OTU TIM alarm may fail to clear on FSLM when using a test set trace
message. FSLM requires eight consecutive good (that is, ending with CR
and LF) trace messages before clearing. When the test set trace message is
disabled, a CR-LF is not sent and the received trace is never updated.
3 Verify that the node received section trace string value matches the expected
value in the PTP section trace screen.
4 Correction of the condition from step 3 clears the alarm. If no condition
existed, the alarm clears within 30 seconds.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared at the NM workstation.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-155
Out-of-range
Category: Equipment
NM Additional Text:
Condition Description:
Out-of-range (OOR) alerts for OPT and OPR are generated when the
monitored LBCnormal crosses the upper threshold setting and when
monitored OPTnormal falls outside the range specified by upper and lower
threshold settings. The warning for LBC-OOR indicates the need for replacing
the optical interface as it is approaching end-of-life.
Procedure 2-156
PDI-P
Category: Communication
Procedure 2-157
PDU mismatch
Category: Equipment
NM Additional Text: NA
Condition Description: The provisioned PDU's are not the same generation.
The PDU Mismatch alarm is raised when a replacement PDU is not the same
type as the PDU replaced.
The user must install the correct PDU to clear the alarm. PDU Mismatch is
cleared when the 5430 Switch no longer detects two generations of PDU
provisioned in the chassis.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the PDU that displays the alarm and note any additional text
information.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-158
PLM-P
Category: Communication
The PLM condition clears when the PLM-P defect clears, the CTP is
administratively locked, or the path is deleted.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the PLM-P warning and note any
additional text.
3 In accordance with local practices, ensure proper provisioning on the drop
side equipment at both the ingress end and egress end of the path.
4 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-159
Power in reduction state
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
Procedure 2-160
PPPCommunicationConflict
Category: Communications subsystem conflict
Step Action
Step Action
10 For each inband IP port that you took note of in step 5, perform the following
substeps.
a. Select the inband IP port in the list at the top of the screen.
b. In the Details area, in the PPP box, in the Admin State field, use the
selector and select “Locked”.
c. In the Details area, in the PPP box, clear the name of the subtended
neighbor from the Node Name field.
Delete the subtended neighbor
11 Click Go > Provisioning > OSPF.
12 Delete the subtended neighbor.
Note: The only way to update the provisioned values for the subtended
neighbor is to delete and re-provision the subtended neighbor.
Re-provision the subtended neighbor using the proper IP address and netmask
13 Re-provision the subtended neighbor, specifying the proper IP address and
netmask, so that the management / DCN IP address that you took note of in
step 1 falls in the subnet.
14 Click Accept to save the Subtended Node profile.
Unlock the PPP admin state of the subtended neighbor
15 Click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs.
16 Select the SONET/SDH TTPs tab.
17 On the SONET/SDH TTPs tab, select the DCC subtab.
18 On the DCC subtab, select the Protocols subtab.
19 In the Details area, in the PPP box, to the right of the Node Name field, there
is a rectangle containing three dots (...). Click on that rectangle.
The Select Neighbor Node dialog box opens.
20 In the Select Neighbor Node dialog box, select the subtended neighbor that
you provisioned in step 13.
21 In the Details area, in the PPP box, in the Admin State field, use the selector
and select “Unlocked”.
The subtended neighbor will be re-associated with the TTPs.
—end—
Procedure 2-161
PPPCommunicationFailure
Category: Communications subsystem conflict
The system raises the PPPCommunicationFailure alarm when the PPP link is
not up for one of the following reasons: (1) because there is a parameter
mismatch in the Link Control Protocol (LCP) parameters or in the Internet
Protocol Control Protocol (IPCP) parameters; (2) because the PPP admin
state at the remote node has been set to Locked. For example, if the
provisioned subtended-neighbor IP address of the unnumbered PPP session
does not match the Remote Side IP address.
Step Action
Procedure 2-162
Provisioning mismatch
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
3 Click Go > Configuring > Ptp and select the Basic tab.
4 In the parameters section, select the desired frequency from the Frequency-
Wavelength drop-down menu.
—continued—
Step Action
5 Click Accept.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-163
Provisioning required
Category: Communication
NM Probable Cause:
Condition Description:
The warning is raised when a Tunable Optical Interface does not have a
wavelength provisioned.
3 Click Go > Configuring > Ptp and select the Basic tab.
4 In the parameters section, select the desired frequency from the Frequency-
Wavelength drop-down menu.
—continued—
Step Action
5 Click Accept.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-164
RDI/MS-RDI
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
RDI indicates the far end equipment is experiencing facility failure on the
signal being received from the near end. This could indicate an undetected
near end equipment failure (for example, optical output failure) or a media
failure (fiber cut) between the near end and the far end. Although conditions
are defined for these faults, they are typically only logged and not reported,
because the node that detected the root cause of the failure will have reported
the failure. Protection services use these defects to determine when a
protection switch is required.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note any additional port alarm information.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 3.
—continued—
Step Action
3 View the Current Alarms details screen and note any related Unavailable
(SNC) alarms.
• If a SNC related alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
Unavailable (SNC) alarm TCP.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, isolate the problem to the incoming
drop or the outgoing drop and perform the associated upstream or
downstream TCP.
4 Check the far end laser in accordance with upstream technology guidelines
for this line to identify the LTE/PTE that may be generating this alarm.
• If any alarms are reported, resolve or refer in accordance with internal
guidelines. When resolved, go to step 5.
• If no upstream alarm can be identified, go to step 5.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-165
Remote nodes per system exceeded
Category: OSI Communication
Condition Description: OSI alarm, raised when Remote Nodes per System
limit exceeds.
The alarm is raised if the count of the remote nodes, maintained in the
mCurNodesPerSystem parameter is greater than the configured value in the
mCnfNodesPerSystem parameter (i.e. Remote Nodes Per System).
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm that displays the source as OSIBASIC and probable cause as Remote
Nodes Per System Exceeded condition.
3 Click Go > Provisioning > OSI and select the General Settings tab and
increase the value of remote nodes in the Remote Nodes Per CD field.
4 Verify that the alarm has cleared. If the alarm has not cleared then go to step
5.
—continued—
Step Action
5 Decrease the NSAP entries on the OSI Route page. This can be done either
by deleting the manually created OSI Routes or by setting the values of area
prefix on all the nodes in the network (on which OSI is enabled). This will
decrease the number of NSAP entries in the OSI Routes page.
6 Verify that the alarm has cleared. If the alarm has not cleared then go to step
7.
7 From the CLI Maintenance Menu, disable the OSI and reboot the Primary
CTM.
8 Verify that the alarm has cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-166
Reference failed
Category: Communications
A Reference Failed alarm occurs when a source reference fails or when the
user removes a reference. The System declares a Reference Failed condition
when an active Synch PU is considered failed or unavailable for a period of
2.5 seconds or greater. Criteria to declare reference failed includes the
following conditions for both line and external references:
• LOS
• LOF
• AIS
• Frequency Out of Range
• Received SSM quality level below the quality level of the internal clock
• Received Invalid SSM
ATTENTION
In rare circumstances, failures involving both primary and secondary CTMs
cannot be reported directly through a Replaceable unit problem alarm.
Instead, this alarm may be reported against a timing source, with
timing_input_ref additional text indicating CLK_LOS for the CTM failure. If
the TCP below does not clear the alarm, follow the TCP in section
Replaceable unit problem.
ATTENTION
The alarm cause information reflects the conditions at the time the failure
occurred.
ATTENTION
The information shown on the config screen is the up to date status of the
reference. It does not reflect the contents of the alarm. The alarm reflects the
conditions at the time the reference failed.
7 Verify that the SF/ESF and AMI/B8ZS formats are correctly provisioned in
accordance with internal guidelines. Correct as necessary.
8 Verify that the SF/ESF or AMI/B8ZS settings were corrected in step 7.
• If the SF/ESF or AMI/B8ZS settings were corrected, go to step 9.
• If the SF/ESF or AMI/B8ZS settings were not corrected, go to step 11.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
10 Disconnect the affected input BITS connector/wires from the back of the
node. Using the proper connector pins (TIP, RING, and GND), connect the
DS1 signal to a test set.
• If the test set reports a valid DS1 signal with the proper SF/ESF and AMI/
B8ZS formats, reconnect the BITS connector/wires to the 5400 Switch
bay and go to step 11.
• If the test set does not report a valid signal with the proper SF/ESF and
AMI/B8ZS formats, correct external clock problem or BITS cabling/
connector problem in accordance with internal guidelines. When the
external problem is corrected, go to step 14.
11 Wait 20 seconds and verify that the alarm cleared at the Node Manager
workstation.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm still exists, go to step 12.
12 Reset primary CTM.
—continued—
Step Action
13 Replace the standby CTM (CTM reset in step 12) in accordance with the
appropriate procedure in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management -
Module Replacement:
• Remove and install 5430 Switch CTM
• Remove and install 5410 Switch CTM
14 Wait 20 seconds and verify that the alarm cleared at the Node Manager
workstation.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-167
Replaceable unit type mismatch
Category: Equipment
NM Additional Text:
• <equipment AID>, <expected_part_code > expected,
<actual_part_code> installed.
• Unknown part number installed. <part code> Rev <rev> not supported by
this software release.
• <equipment AID>, Unsupported PDU, Please complete the fan upgrade.
• <equipment AID>, Unsupported Switch Module, Please complete the fan
upgrade.
• <equipment AID>, Unsupported Line Module, Please complete the fabric
upgrade.
• <equipment AID>, Unsupported Line Module, Please complete the PDU
upgrade.
To clear the alarm, the user must install the correct module/ delete the existing
module from inventory or complete the appropriate upgrade.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the alarm and note any additional
text information.
• If the additional text information indicates that replaced module is an
unknown part number or not supported by this release, go to step 6 and
replace the module with one supported in this release.
• If the additional text information is empty or indicates that replaced
module is an unexpected part number, go to step 3.
• If the additional text information is “<equipment AID>, Unsupported PDU,
Please complete the fan upgrade” then complete the fan upgrade and go
to step 7.
• If the additional text information is “<equipment AID>, Unsupported
Switch Module, Please complete the fan upgrade” then complete the fan
upgrade and go to step 7.
• If the additional text information is “<equipment AID>, Unsupported Line
Module, Please complete the fabric upgrade” then complete the SM
upgrade and go to step 7.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-168
Replaceable unit missing
Category: Equipment
ATTENTION
All circuit packs provide a Maintenance LED (MNT) which is illuminated
yellow to indicate the circuit pack has been administratively locked and can
be removed without causing a Replaceable Unit Missing condition.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the alarm.
• If an Input Power alarm or Total Loss of Communications alarm is
present, discontinue this procedure and perform the TCP for the
appropriate alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed Replaceable Unit is displayed
and note the shelf and slot designation.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
—continued—
Step Action
4 At the node, replace the circuit pack in accordance with the appropriate
procedure from 5400 Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module
Replacement:
Removing and installing a 5400 Switch fan assembly
Remove and install 5430 Switch CTM
Remove and install 5410 Switch CTM
Removing and installing a 5400 Switch module
Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP
Removing and installing a 5400 Switch line module
Removing and installing a 5430 Switch display module
Removing and installing a 5430 Switch I/O module
Removing and installing a 5410 Switch I/O module
5 Verify that there are no red LED alarms at the node.
• If there are no red LED alarms, go to step 6.
• If there are red LED alarms, repeat step 4 and replace the alarmed circuit
pack. If the circuit pack has already been replaced, go to step 6.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm did not clear, repeat the remove and install procedure in
accordance with the applicable procedure to reseat the circuit pack.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-169
Replaceable unit problem
Category: Equipment
Severity
The Replaceable Unit Problem (RUP) condition has the following severity
parameters:
• Critical, service affecting if the failure affects unprotected traffic.
• Critical, service affecting if the failed equipment causes a timing plane
failure and is not protected. The System changes the severity and service
indication to Major, Non service affecting if the failed equipment causes a
timing plane failure and is protected.
• Critical, service affecting for defects which result in a HIR or failed state for
a SM regardless of the protection status.
• Major, Non service affecting for a failed PDU.
• Minor, Non service affecting for a failed I/O Panel or Display Panel.
• Major, Non service affecting for Flash Card End of Life
Additional Text
When the System declares a Replaceable Unit Problem (RUP) condition
against equipment the RUP additional text field includes the equipment Serial
Number. The serial number is included in addition to any RUP specific
additional texts as described below. The serial number field is separated from
the other additional text by a comma:
SN=<Serial Number>
• For multiple conditions on the same port, the System the Isolation
Mechanisms following the Port Identity. For multiple conditions on multiple
ports, the System lists each port followed by the Isolation Mechanism(s).
• The Port Identity field indicates the Port Group and affected Ports where
the failure has been isolated:
<PG[1-12],Port[1-4]>
• The Port Identity field indicates the Port Group and affected Ports where
the failure has been isolated.
<PG[1,2,..x],Port[1,2..x]>
Table 2-2
5400 TPHF isolation mechanism codes
Examples of the TPFI RUP notification additional text are listed as follows:
TPHF,I50;
PTPHF,PG1,Port1,I56;
PTPHF,PG1,Port1,2,PG2,Port7,8,PG3,Port9,10,11,12,I56;
• The Link Identity List is comma delimited where each item in the list
follows this format (the '<' and '>' below denote "the value of"):
<AID of Tx Component>,<AID of Rx Component>
• The Link Identity List is comma delimited where each item in the list
follows this format (the '<' and '>' below denote "the value of"):
<AID of Tx Component>,<AID of Rx Component>
• For multiple conditions on the same port, the System lists the Isolation
Mechanisms following the Port Identity. For multiple conditions on multiple
ports, the System lists each port followed by the Isolation Mechanism(s).
• The Port Identity field indicates the Port Group and affected Ports where
the failure has been isolated.
<PG[1-12],Port[1-4]>
ATTENTION
The Error Type Bit Mask and Link Identity Lists are optionally because some
errors do not produce them. For example, an STSX internal error will not
have any associated links.
Table 2-3
5400 DPHF isolation mechanism codes
I01 InitFailureDetection
I03 STSXInternalFailureDetection
I04 STSXInputLinkWarningIsolation
I05 STSXInputLinkFailureIsolation
I07 LmHardFailedPowerFailureDetection
I08 LmHardFailedCpFailureDetection
I09 SmHardFailed
I10 BankSelectFailureDetection
I12 LmComponentFailureDetection
I15 ComProgramingFailureDetection
I16 LinkEnableFailureDetection
I17 DeviceOverTemperature
I21 FramerFailureDetection
Examples of the DPHF RUP notification additional text are listed as follows:
DPHF,I03,0x400;
PDPHF,PG1,Port1,I05,0x4,1-A-1.1,1-A-1.a;
PDPHF,PG1,Port1,I05,0x4,1-A-1.1,1-A-1.a,PG4,Port4,I05,0x4,1-A-1.4,1-A-1.a;
PDPHF,PG1,Port1-4,I05,0x4,1-A-2.1,1-A-2.a,PG4,Port13-16,I05,0x4,1-A-2.4,1-A-
2.a;
PDPHF,PG2,Port2,I21,0x8,0x4;
PDPHF,PG1,Port1-4,I05,0x4,1-A-2.1,1-A-2.a,PG4,Port13-16,I05,0x4,1-A-2.4,1-A-
2.a;DPHF,I05,0x4,1-A-2.a,1-B-1.a,1-A-2.a,1-B-1.b,1-A-2.a,1-B-1.c,1-A-2.a,1-
B-2.a;
Table 2-4
5400 CPHF isolation mechanism codes
I80 Re-booting
Table 2-4
5400 CPHF isolation mechanism codes (continued)
Examples of the CPFI RUP notification additional text are listed as follows:
CPFI:
CPHF,I88;
ATTENTION
Once fault management declares a failure, it remains declared until the card
is removed. However, any condition that is reported externally is subject to
the rules concerning the admin lock state of the equipment (for example,
conditions are remitted when the module is placed in admin lock and
reasserted when the admin lock is removed). The normal procedure for
removing a card is to first place it in admin lock (remitting the condition) and
then to remove it. If the operator fails to place the card into admin lock prior
to removing it, the failure condition is still remitted when the card is removed
and a replaceable unit missing condition is asserted.
If the fault signature changes after the Replaceable Unit Problem has been
declared, the System l clears the condition on the TL1 interface, and re-assert
it with updated information.
If the fault signature changes after the Replaceable Unit Problem has been
declared, the System updates the condition on the CORBA interface with
updated information.
The System clears the Replaceable Unit Problem condition when the
equipment is administratively locked or removed.
The System raises the Replaceable Unit Problem condition when the fault
persists and the equipment is removed from an administratively locked state.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the alarmed module and note any additional information.
• If Input Power or Total Loss of Communications alarms are present,
discontinue this procedure and execute the TCP for the appropriate
alarm.
• If additional information indicates circuit pack is rebooting or in a
degraded state, then wait indicated time and go to step 6.
3 Expand the Equipment Tree until the alarmed Replaceable Unit is displayed
and note the shelf and slot designation.
• If the alarmed Replaceable Unit is an SFP/XFP/CFP, go to step 4.
• If the alarmed Replaceable Unit is a LM, go to step 9.
• If the alarmed Replaceable Unit is not a LM or SFP/XFP/CFP, go to step
11.
4 If multiple SFPs/XFPs on any one LM are reporting RUP alarms, contact the
next level of support. If only one SFP/XFP/CFP is affected then proceed with
step 5.
5 Change the Administrative State of the SFP/XFP/CFP to Locked using the
Node Manager Inventory screen. Verify the Administrative State has changed
to Locked.
6 Change the Administrative State of the SFP/XFP/CFP to Unlocked using the
Node Manager Inventory screen. Verify the Administrative State has changed
to Unlocked.
7 Check that the Operational State and Availability Status are Enabled and
Acceptable, respectively. Check that the Alarm Status box is clear.
—continued—
Step Action
—continued—
Step Action
11 If the replaceable unit problem circuit pack is the secondary CTM, check the
additional text information for code I101.
If additional text Then
is not I101 proceed to step step 12
is I101 I101 is a persistence store DB sync failure between
the primary and secondary CTMs. The alarm is raised
against the secondary CTM however, both CTMs must
be checked isolate the fault to the correct CTM.
Perform the following:
a. Click Go > Inventory then expand the equipment tree and select the
primary CTM.
b. Verify Operational State is Enabled, Alarm Status is N/A, Alarm
Status is blank, and Procedural Status is Providing Service.
If primary CTM Then
is ok replace secondary CTM and proceed to step 16.
not ok contact the next level of support.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
12 At the node, verify that the replaceable unit problem circuit pack in question
has a red LED illuminated.
13 Replace the circuit pack in accordance with the appropriate procedure as
listed above.
14 When an SM is replaced but does not come up in 60 seconds, repeat the
replacement procedure to reseat the SM. If the SM still does not come up
within 60 seconds, replace and RMA the SM.
—continued—
Step Action
ATTENTION
The SM does not have a microprocessor and relies on dedicated hardware
to control LEDs. Under certain failure conditions the LEDs might get out of
sync with the alarm state as indicated by the CTM to Core Switching
Manager or Node Manager. Use Core Switching Manager and Node
Manager statements of alarms/conditions for SM related alarms/conditions.
Procedure 2-170
SDCC/LDCC
Category: Communication
NM Additional Text:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > CCC and select the channel that displays the
SDCC/LDCC alarm.
3 Verify the admin state is UNLOCKED.
4 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-171
SD/SF
Category: Quality Of Service
NM Additional Text:
• SD- signal degrade threshold of 10E-XX crossed
• SF- signal failed threshold of 10E-XX crossed
Default Severity: Dynamic - Minor, Non service affecting for ports with
protected status, or Major, service affecting for ports with unprotected status
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the SD/SF alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed port is displayed and verify that no
equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with the guidelines of that technology. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch network, the upstream LTE or MSTE is another 5400
Switch or CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a network drop, the
upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The far end upstream
LTE or MSTE laser should be checked for the following:
• SFP/XFP/CFP and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment
failures or Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective
action: replace the SFP/XFP/CFP, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace SFP/XFP/CFP or equivalent with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
port, expand the Node Manager configuration tree and select the port,
click Go > Inventory and select the Physical TP tab, then ensure that
the provisioned optical rate is correct. Always lock the port before
correcting and unlock when completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the SFP/XFP/
CFP or port.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit port fiber connector, replace the
SFP/XFP/CFP or equivalent, and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400
Switch or CoreDirector Switch technology.).
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical multiplexer tests bad,
repair in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to
step 22.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical multiplexer tests
good, go to step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Remove the port receive fiber and insert the receive fiber into a test set
capable of reading bit errors, as well as light level.
6 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 7.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 14.
7 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices and reinsert receive fiber into test set.
8 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 9.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 19.
9 Verify that the received light level is within specification defined in SFP/XFP/
CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
• If the received light level is within specification, go to step 13.
• If the received light level is not within specification, go to step 10.
—continued—
Step Action
10 Determine if there are one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit LTE or MSTE checked in step 4 and the receive LTE or
MSTE in alarm).
• If there are no WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 11.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 12.
11 The output of the far end upstream LTE or MSTE was previously tested in
step 4. The low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty
or defective fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit LTE or
MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or MSTE. Isolate and clean/repair the
fiber or connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired, go to
step 22.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired, go
to step 24.
12 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed port. Correct any problems that are found.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 22.
13 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit LTE or MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or
MSTE in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 22.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 24.
14 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
& Equipment Safety Practices.
15 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
16 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree to the
port in alarm.
17 Click Go > Configuring > Trail TPs.
—continued—
Step Action
18 View the Configured Rate box and ensure that the correct optical rate is
selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 19.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
19 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP/XFP/CFP in
accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
20 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 21.
21 Replace the module, then go to step 24.
22 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 24.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to step 23.
23 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP/XFP/CFP in
accordance with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
24 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-172
SD-P/SF-P
Category: Quality Of Service
Default Severity: Dynamic - Minor, Non service affecting for ports with
protected status, or Major, service affecting for ports with unprotected status
The Signal Degrade -Path (SD-P) condition and Signal Fail - Path (SF-P) are
similar to the conditions covered in Procedure 2-171, “SD/SF”, but are applied
to the path layer.
Procedure 2-173
Secondary CTM initializing
Category: Service report
The Secondary CTM Initializing alarm is raised when the Secondary CTM is
synchronizing the database with the Primary CTM and there is no RUP CPHF
condition against the Secondary CTM.
—end—
Procedure 2-174
Section trace mismatch
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The STS PTE detects a Section Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM-S) defect
within 30 seconds when none of the sampled 64 or 16-byte STS path trace
strings match the provisioned value. The 5400 Switch declares an Section
Trace Mismatch failure if a TIM-S defect persists for 2.5 seconds. The TIM-S
defect clears if it is absent for 10 seconds.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
3 Verify that the LTE or MSTE received STS section trace string value matches
the expected value in the PTP section trace screen.
4 Correction of the condition from step 3 should clear the alarm. If no condition
existed, the alarm should clear after no more than 30 seconds.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared at the NM workstation.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-175
Signaled SNCP automatic switch
Category: Service report
NM Additional Text:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the Signaled SNCP automatic switch
condition.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed port is displayed and verify that no
equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream LTE or
MSTE is another 5400 Switch or CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a
network drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The
far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser should be checked for the following:
• Port and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace the port, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace port or equivalent with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch port, expand the Node Manager configuration tree, select
the Physical TP and Basic tabs, and ensure that the provisioned optical
rate is correct. Always lock the port before correcting and unlock when
completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port or
equivalent.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit port or equivalent fiber connector,
replace the port or equivalent, and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400
Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical multiplexer tests bad,
repair in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to
step 25.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical multiplexer tests
good, go to step 5.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Remove the alarmed port receive fiber. Insert the receive fiber into a test set
capable of reading bit errors and light level.
—continued—
Step Action
Step Action
Step Action
24 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 26.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to step 26.
25 Reconnect the receive fiber, then reinstall the port.
26 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-176
Signaled SNCP fail to switch
Category: Communication
NM Additional Text:
Condition Description: Defects on both the Work and Protect paths prevent
protection switch
The S-SNCP Fail to Switch alarm is raised when a S-SNCP protection feature
is unable to perform an automatic protection switch. The alarm clears when
the switch succeeds or if the protection switch is no longer required because
the underlying failure cleared.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab.
3 Note and clear any path faults protection switch byte failure, Signaled SNCP
Failure to Switch, and far end protect line fail alarms.
4 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-177
Signaled SNCP fail to revert
Category: Reporting event
NM Probable Cause:
Condition Description:
When the S-SNCP fails to revert within the TODR window, the S-SNCP Fail
To Revert event is raised.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab. Note
the module that displays the Signaled SNCP fail to revert alarm.
3 Verify no automatic switches are active.
• If automatic switches are active or the original alarm has not cleared, then
go to step 4
• If alarm has cleared, then go to step 6
4 Determine if a user switch (manual, forced or lockout) is active. release the
switch.
• If no switches are active or the alarm has cleared, then go to step 5
• If alarm has cleared, then go to step 6
5 If the alarm remains active, ensure that no other alarm is active
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-178
Signaled SNCP forced switch to protect
Category: Service report
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the Signaled SNCP forced switch to
protect warning.
3 From the list under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Groups tab,
select the protection unit identified in step 2.
4 Verify the state of the working path in the Administer/Status field; it should be
OKAY.
5 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
6 Click Yes in confirmation dialog.
7 If there are several locked protection units in the ASNCP group, from the list
under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the
signaled SNCP protection group.
8 Click the Release button in Administer All PUs field.
9 Click Accept.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-179
Signaled SNCP forced switch to working
Category: Service report
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the Signaled SNCP forced switch to
working warning.
3 Under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Protection Units tab,
select the ASNCP protection unit identified in step 2 from the list in the list
frame.
4 Click the Release button in the Administer/Status field.
5 Click Yes in confirmation dialog.
6 If there are several protection units switched, under the Go > Protection >
Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the ASNCP group identified in step
2 from the list in the list frame.
7 Click the Release button in Administer All PUs field.
8 Click Accept.
9 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-180
Signaled SNCP lockout of protection
Category: Service report
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the Signaled SNCP lockout of
protection warning.
3 From the list under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Protection
Unit tab, select the protection unit identified in step 2.
4 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
5 If there are several locked protection units in the ASNCP group, from the list
under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the
signaled SNCP protection group.
6 Click the Release button in Administer All PUs field.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-181
Signaled SNCP manual switch to protect
Category: Service report
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the Signaled SNCP manual switch
to protect condition.
3 Under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Protection Unit tab,
select the protection unit identified in step 2 from the list.
4 Click the Release button in Administer/Status field.
5 If there are several switched protection units in the ASNCP group, under the
Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the signaled
SNCP protection group from the list.
6 Click the Release button in Administer all PUs field.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-182
Signaled SNCP manual switch to working
Category: Service report
NM Additional Text:
This warning is raised when a manual switch to the working path is initiated
and the S-SNCP protection is provisioned as revertive. The condition is
cleared when a higher priority switch is initiated or when the manual switch is
released.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the Signaled SNCP manual switch
to working warning.
3 From the list under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Protection
Unit tab, select the protection unit identified in step 2.
4 Verify the state of the protect path in the Administer/Status field; it should be
OKAY.
5 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
6 Click YES in the confirmation dialog.
7 If there are several locked protection units in the ASNCP group, from the list
under the Go > Protection > Path Level > SNCP > Group tab, select the
signaled SNCP protection group.
8 Click the Release button in Administer all PUs field.
—continued—
Step Action
9 Click Accept.
10 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-183
SNC fail to revert
Category: Reporting event
NM Probable Cause:
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
condition, and note the port that displays the SNC fail to revert alarm.
3 Verify no automatic switches are active.
• If automatic switches are active or the original alarm has not cleared, then
go to step 4
• If alarm has cleared, then go to step 7
4 Determine if a user switch (manual, forced or lockout) is active. release the
switch.
• If no switches are active or the alarm has cleared, then go to step 5
• If alarm has cleared, then go to step 7
5 If the alarm remains active, ensure that no other alarm is active
6 Click Accept.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-184
SNC home path not defined
Category: Communications
Condition Description:
TL1 String:
The SNC Home Path not Defined condition is raised if a SNC with Reserved
Home Path enabled does not have a Home Path. This can occur if the SNC
Home Path is released without successfully setting up a new Home Path.
ATTENTION
A "Home Path Not Defined" alarm can be raised against a reserved home
path SNC during regroom during BW lockout to current route or regroom
where this link is along the least cost path. Even though the bandwidth on
this link is advertised as zero, the current SNC understands there is room for
itself as it is currently there. The regroom releases the home path
reservation. To clear, issue a regroom when there is sufficient BW not in BW
lockout for the SNC to successfully setup.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
condition, and note the port that displays the SNC home path not defined
alarm.
3 Click Go > Provisioning > SNC and select the SNC in alarm.
4 Ensure that if this is a DTL SNC or if constraints are provided, there is valid
path for that particular SNC.
—continued—
Step Action
ATTENTION
In the snc regroom parameters dialog box, the user has the option to use
the "Make current Path as Home Path" which has the opportunity to re-
establish the home path without traffic impact.
7 Click Apply.
8 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-185
SNC manual regroom status
Category: Reporting event
NM Additional Text:
—end—
Procedure 2-186
SNC resize status
Category: Reporting event
SNC resize status reports the status of a ODUFlex SNC resizing operation.
—end—
Procedure 2-187
SNC restored using preemption
Category: Communication
1 The SNC preempts a home path as a last resort. To clear the alarm an
alternate route has to be made available and the SNC switched to this
alternate route. This alternate route switch can happen due to Mesh, MSP,
Auto Reversion or Manual Reversion using MSP.
2 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-188
SNC reverse path setup failure
Category: Reporting Event
NM Additional Text: NA
1 To clear the alarm an alternate route has to be made available between the
originating/terminating node and the pinch node. Resolve any port, line,
bandwidth issues between the originating/terminating node and the pinch
node.
2 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-189
SPLI loopback test active
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
—end—
Procedure 2-190
Superuser logged in
Category: Usage report
NM Additional Text:
Procedure 2-191
TAP connection active
Category: Service report
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
condition, and note the port that displays the TAP connection active warning.
• If power conditions alarms are present, discontinue this procedure and
perform the TCP for the appropriate alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and note the
shelf and slot designation.
4 Click Go > Diagnostics > TAP Connection, select the TAP connection and
press Delete.
5 Click Accept.
6 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, repeat the above procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-192
TC-AIS
Category: Communication
—end—
Procedure 2-193
TC-LTC
Category: Communication
—end—
Procedure 2-194
TC-RDI
Category: Communication
—end—
Procedure 2-195
TCM AIS
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
condition, and note the port that displays the TCM AIS alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
3 Expand the 5400 Switch equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed
and verify that no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
4 Remove the incoming fiber to the port and connect the fiber to an optical test
set.
• If test set reports incoming TCM AIS or any other line signal defect, the
section trouble is external. The source of the upstream AIS must be
manually isolated.
ATTENTION
If a signal defect is isolated to the upstream node, check the upstream node
laser as indicated in step 4. When the root cause of the AIS alarm is isolated
and resolved, go to step 6.
• If the test set does not report incoming AIS or any other line signal defect,
go to step 5.
5 Reconnect fiber, reinstall OM, SFP or XFP, and recheck alarm status.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm still exists, go to step 6.
6 Replace the OM, SFP or XFP
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-196
TCM BDI
Category: Communication
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
TCM BDI alarm, and note any additional port alarm information.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 3.
3 View the Current Alarms details screen and note any related Unavailable
(SNC) alarms.
• If an alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
Unavailable (SNC) alarm TCP.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, isolate the problem to the incoming
drop or the outgoing drop and perform the associated upstream or
downstream TCP.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end laser in accordance with upstream technology guidelines
for this line to identify the node that may be generating this alarm.
• If any alarms are reported, resolve or refer in accordance with internal
guidelines. When resolved, go to step 5.
• If no upstream alarm can be identified, go to step 5.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-197
TCM DEG
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The TCM-DEG alarm is raised when an TCM DEG defect persists for 2.5
(±0.5) seconds.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the TCM DEG alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed port is displayed and verify that no
equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream LTE or
MSTE is another 5400 Switch or CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a
network drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The
far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser should be checked for the following:
• Port and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace the port, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace port or equivalent with correct rate,
wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit
5400 Switch port, expand the Node Manager configuration tree, select
the Physical TP and Basic tabs, and ensure that the provisioned optical
rate is correct. Always lock the port before correcting and unlock when
completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port or
equivalent.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit port or equivalent fiber connector,
replace the port or equivalent, and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400
Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical multiplexer tests bad,
repair in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to
step 24.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical multiplexer tests
good, go to step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Remove the alarmed port receive fiber. Insert the receive fiber into a test set
capable of reading bit errors and light level.
6 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 7.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 14.
7 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices and reinsert receive fiber into test set.
8 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 9.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 19.
9 The received light level should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description. Verify
that the received light level is within specification.
• If the received light level is within specification, go to step 13.
• If the received light level is not within specification, go to step 10.
—continued—
Step Action
10 Determine if there are one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit node checked in step 4 and the receive node in alarm).
• If there are no WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 11.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 12.
11 The output of the far end upstream node was previously tested in step 4. The
low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty or defective
fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit node and the
receive 5400 Switch node. Isolate and clean/repair the fiber or connector
trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired, go to
step 22.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired, go
to step 24.
12 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch port in alarm. Correct any problems that are found.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 22.
13 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit node and the receive 5400 Switch node in alarm in
accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking for higher rate
WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include checking any
fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and fibers and
connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output lasers from
one WDM system to another.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 22.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 24.
14 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
& Equipment Safety Practices.
15 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
16 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree to the
port in alarm.
17 Click Go > Configuring > Ptp and select the Basic tab.
—continued—
Step Action
18 View the Service Type box and ensure that the correct optical rate is
selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 19.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
19 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP in accordance
with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
20 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure. If the alarm did not clear, go to
step 21.
21 Replace the module, then go to step 24.
22 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 24.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to step 23.
23 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the SFP in accordance
with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
24 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-198
TCM delay measurement failure
Category: Communication
The Delay Measurement Failure alarm is raised when the system cannot
successfully complete a requested delay measurement on a ODUk or ODUkT
with Delay Measurement enabled.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the NE that displays the TCM delay measurement failure
alarm.
3 In the upstream node, select the transmitter port and verify the following:
— Ensure that no equipment alarms exist. If an equipment alarm exists,
discontinue this procedure and perform the trouble clearing procedure
for the alarmed equipment.
— Ensure that ODUk(T) is free of LOF or LTC alarms. If alarm exists,
follow the trouble clearing procedure for LOF or LTC accordingly.
— Ensure that parent layer OTUk is free of LOS, LOF or LOL alarms. If
any alarms are reported, perform the trouble clearing procedure in
accordance with internal guidelines.
4 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-199
TCM LCK
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
A TCM-LCK alarm is raised when an TCM dLCK defect persists for 2.5 (±0.5)
seconds.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the TCM LCK alarm.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
3 Expand the equipment tree in the upstream node, until the alarmed unit is
displayed and note the shelf and slot designation.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-200
TCM LOF
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The TCM Loss of Frame alarm is raised when an ODUk dLOFLOM defect
persists for 2.5 (±0.5) seconds.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the TCM LOF alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify that
no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream node laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream node is
another 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a network
drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The far end
upstream node laser should be checked for the following:
• OM and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace SFP/XFP/CFP, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace SFP/XFP/CFP with correct rate, wavelength,
and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a transmit 5400 Switch/
CoreDirector Switch port, select the port, expand the Node Manager
configuration tree, click Go > Configuring and select the Physical TP
tab, then ensure that the provisioned optical rate is correct. Always lock
the port before correcting and unlock when completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port.)
• The output level of the laser should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description.
(Corrective action: clean the transmit SFP/XFP/CFP fiber connector,
replace the SFP/XFP/CFP, and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400
Switch/CoreDirector Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream node laser or optical multiplexer tests bad, repair
in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to step 21.
• If the far end upstream node laser and optical multiplexer test good, go to
step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
Step Action
10 Determine if there are one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit node checked in step 4 and the Receive node in
alarm).
• If there are no WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 11.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 12.
11 The output of the far end upstream node was previously tested in step 4. The
low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty or defective
fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit node and the
receive 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch. Isolate and clean/repair the fiber or
connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
• If a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired, go to
step 21.
• If no defective or dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired, go
to step 23.
12 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch OM or port in alarm. Correct any
problems that are found.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 21.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 23.
13 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit node and the receive 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch
node in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 21.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected, go to step 23.
14 Clean the OM or port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard
Cleaning & Equipment Safety Practices.
15 Check that the installed receive OM or port is the correct type (rate,
wavelength, and reach) by verifying the part number.
16 From within the Node Manager application, expand the equipment tree to the
OM or port in alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
17 Click Go > Configuring and select the Physical TP tab, then ensure that the
provisioned optical rate is correct by viewing the Configured Rate box to
ensure that the correct optical rate is selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 18.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
18 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the OM in accordance
with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
19 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 20.
20 Replace the module and then go to step 23.
21 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level that is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level that is out of
specification, go to step 23.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level that is out of
specification, go to
step 22.
22 Reconnect the receive fiber and if applicable, reinstall the OM in accordance
with Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
23 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-201
TCM LTC
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
Default Severity:
• Unprotected CA disabled: Warning
• Protected CA enabled: Minor
• Unprotected CA enabled: Major
A TCM Loss of Tandem Connection (LTC) alarm is raised when an TCM dLTC
defect persists for 2.5 (±0.5) seconds.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the TCM LTC alarm.
3 Expand the equipment tree in the upstream node, until the alarmed unit is
displayed and note the shelf and slot designation.
4 Check the upstream configuration:
— If the requisite TCM layer is not generated or monitored at any of the
upstream peer nodes, setup TCM monitoring as per recommended
procedure.
— If the requisite TCM layer is generated or monitored at any of the peer
nodes, proceed to the next step.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-202
TCM OCI
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
A TCM Open Connection Indication (OCI) alarm is raised when a TCM dOCI
defect persists for 2.5 (±0.5) seconds.
1 Perform the Alarm clearing procedure for the TCM LTC alarm.
2 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-203
TCM TIM
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
Default Severity:
• Warning, Non service affecting when Consequent Actions are disabled
• Minor, Non service affecting when Consequent Actions are enabled
A TCM-TIM alarm is raised when a TCM layer dTIM Mismatch defect persists
for 2.5 (±0.5) seconds.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the TCM TIM alarm.
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
3 Check if the third party upstream node is configured to transmit any TCM
trace value:
• If TCM is transmitted then disable it, by using recommended procedure.
• If TCM is not transmitted proceed to next step.
4 Disconnect the fiber and connect to a test set.
5 Monitor the trace (SAPI, DAPI) for the configured TCM level.
• If trace is not null, then check the integrity of the signal.
• If signal reports other alarms, then clear these alarms using the
recommended procedure.
6 Disconnect fiber from test set and reconnect to module.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-204
Test session active
Category: Service report
A Test Session Active condition is raised when a PTP or TTP is under test and
cleared when the PTP or TTP is removed from test.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, and note
the PPT or TTP associated with the Test session active condition.
• If power conditions are present, discontinue this procedure and perform
the TCP for the appropriate alarm.
3 Select Go > Configuring > Ptp.
4 In the List frame, select the port.
5 In the Details frame, select the Basic tab.
6 In the Status group box, select Locked from the Admin State drop-down
menu.
7 Click Accept.
8 Set the Control Status to Not Relevant and click Accept.
9 Set the Admin State to Unlocked and click Accept.
10 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-205
TIM-P
Category: Communication
Default Severity: Dynamic - Minor, Non service affecting for ports with
protected status, or Major, service affecting for ports with unprotected status
TL1 String:
• TIM (SONET/SDH)
The STS Path Terminating Equipment (PTE) detects a TIM-P defect within 30
seconds when none of the sampled 64 or 16 byte STS path trace strings
match the provisioned expected value. A node declares a TIM-P failure if a
TIM-P defect persists for 2.5 seconds. The TIM-P defect clears when the CTP
is administratively locked, when the path is deleted, when path trace is
administratively disabled, or if the mismatch is absent for 10 seconds.
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the TIM-P alarm.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
3 Verify that the node is not provisioned with an incorrect network cross
connect.
4 Verify that the node is provisioned using the appropriate near and far end
CTPs.
5 Verify that the received STS path trace string value matches the expected
value in the CTP path trace screen.
6 Correcting the condition described in step 3 through step 5 should clear the
alarm. If this condition did not exist, the TIM-P alarm should clear within 30
seconds.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-206
Timing backup not available
Category: Communications
This condition is raised when the standby CTM is unable to provide timing for
the node. This condition is not raised when the standby CTM is in faststart
mode or holdover mode because these states can provide timing for the node
and are covered under the Clock mode not normal TCP.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
Timing backup not available alarm, and note any additional alarm information
and note any additional reported alarms In the following order:
• If any Replaceable unit missing, Replaceable unit problem, or
Replaceable unit type mismatch alarms are raised against either of the
Control and Timing Modules, discontinue this procedure and perform the
associated TCP.
• If the secondary CTM is booting, wait 15 minutes, then go to step 3.
3 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-207
Timing force - lockout
Category: Service report
The node also reports (as a default) a minor alarm when the first of one or
more concurrent or consecutive Forced Reference Switch or Lockout a
Reference commands is completed. The condition clears when all Forced
Reference Switch and/or Lockout a Reference commands have been cleared.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the Timing force - lockout alarm.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-208
TODR-DOW reversion inhibited
Category: Communication
NM Probable Cause:
NM Additional Text:
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the TODR-DOW reversion inhibited alarm.
3 Click Go > Provisioning > TODR Profiles.
4 From the list frame, select the TODR profiles for the object configured as
disabled.
5 In the detail frame, check the “Profile Enabled” check box, to enable selected
profile.
6 Click Accept.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, proceed to the following step.
—continued—
Step Action
8 From the list frame, select the TODR profiles for the object configured as
disabled.
9 Press “Delete” to delete the TODR profile selected in the list frame.
10 Click Accept.
11 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-209
TTI Mismatch Condition
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
Default Severity:
• Warning, Non service affecting when Consequent Actions are disabled
• Minor, Non service affecting when Consequent Actions are enabled
• Critical, Service affecting for unprotected ports
This alarm is raised when the trail trace identifier (TTI) value received by the
facility differs from the expected provisioned TTI value. This can be caused by
incorrect fibering or incorrect provisioning of the TTI value.
The TCM TTI mismatch detection is based on the comparison of the Actual
received TTI and Expected received TTI values of the following components:
• Source Access Point Identifier (SAPI) only (default)
• Destination Access Point Identifier (DAPI) only
• SAPI + DAPI
1 Use the optical fiber connection information to identify the transmit and
receive sites of the alarmed signal.
2 Verify that the optical fiber connections are correct on the circuit pack that is
raising the alarm and on the upstream circuit pack.
3 From the Node Manager Configuring menu, select the appropriate OTN
TTPs, ODU CTPs, or ODU TCM CTPs Trail Trace tab and use the Trace
group box to retrieve the TTI values for the optical facilities at the transmit
network element and at the alarmed receive network element.
4 Select your next step.
If the alarm Then
clears this procedure is complete
does not clear go to step 5
5 Compare the outgoing TTI value of the transmit signal at the transmit network
element with the expected TTI value of the receive signal at the receive
network element.
If the values are different, change the expected TTI value of the receive signal
to match the outgoing TTI value of the transmit signal.
6 If the alarm does not clear, contact your next level of support or your Ciena
support group.
—end—
Procedure 2-210
Revertive switch (timing reference switch)
Category: Communications
This condition is raised when any switch to a timing reference with a lower
priority than the currently selected reference occurs. This condition is cleared
when reversion to the highest priority level reference has completed or when
the Sync PG enters a holdover or free-run state.
In the case where the Sync PG enters a holdover or free-run state, the Timing
Reference Switch Condition clears and a Clock Mode Not Normal Condition
is raised. If the Sync PG then recovers to a lower priority PU from Holdover or
Free-run; the Timing Reference Switch condition is again raised.
Existing Timing Reference Switch Condition are cleared and a new Timing
Reference Switch Condition is raised when a switch to a timing reference with
a lower priority than the currently selected reference occurs.
Procedure 2-211
Non-revertive switch (timing reference switch)
Category: Reporting event
TL1 String: PS
The System reports a Timing Reference Switch for any switch to a timing
reference with the same priority as the currently selected reference.
—end—
Procedure 2-212
Trace mismatch
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The PTE detects a Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) defect within 30 seconds
when none of the sampled 64 or 16-byte path trace strings match the
provisioned value. The 5400 Switch declares an Trace Mismatch if a TIM
defect persists for 2.5 seconds. The TIM defect clears if it is absent for 10
seconds.
3 Verify that the LTE or MSTE received trace string value matches the expected
value in the PTP section trace screen.
4 Correction of the condition from step 3 should clear the alarm. If no condition
existed, the alarm should clear after no more than 30 seconds.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-213
Transmit mismatch
Category: Communication
NM Additional Text:
Condition Description:
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the module that displays the Transmit mismatch alarm.
3 Check the settings at both the upstream and local nodes.
4 Change the configuration parameters to the local or far end nodes as
required.
5 Verify the settings at both ends are similar.
6 Click Accept.
7 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-214
Transmitter tuning in progress
Category: Communication
NM Probable Cause:
Condition Description:
The warning is cleared when the tuning process is competed on the Tunable
Optical Interface and the PTP is placed in Administrative Lock or ARC Lock.
—end—
Procedure 2-215
Unavailable (SNC)
Category: Communication
NM Additional Text:
Condition Description:
• SNC cannot be re-routed
• Alarm is generated whenever there is a node or link failure while P-SNC is
working.
This alarm occurs when the SNC is in the creating or starting state. It is
typically caused by destination unreachable due to insufficient bandwidth, no
matching service classes, or no physical facility to the destination port.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
—continued—
Step Action
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the Unavailable (SNC) alarm and note
any additional information.
ATTENTION
If the additional information is “SNC lost during re-boot. Please delete and
re-create.”, then the problem happened due to drop side CTP being lost
during a CTM reboot. When SNC creation is done, drop side CTP can be
created by providing the port and timeslots while creating the SNC. Another
way to create the SNC is to specify the CTP or GTP name, in such a case,
the CTP or GTP has to be created before, so that SNC when created does
not give an exception.
3 If the additional information is SNC lost during re-boot. Please delete and
re-create., delete and recreate the SNC and go to step 13; otherwise, go to
step 4.
4 Expand the equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify that
no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 5.
5 Click Provisioning and select the SNC tab. View the Provisioning SNC
screen and check the route to see whether a current route is available.
• If a current route is not available, go to step 9.
• If a current route is available, go to step 6.
6 View the provisioning SNC screen and note the nodes and the ports of the
home route.
7 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to all of the 5400 Switch or CoreDirector Switch nodes
that are indicated in the home route.
8 Expand each equipment tree until the alarmed port is displayed and verify
that no equipment alarms exist.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
• If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 12.
9 Click Provisioning and select the SNC tab. At the Local End Point field click
(...) SNC State to view the Connection Status of the SNC.
10 If the status column indicates “Failed to get working route from OSRP due to
Max Admin Weight,” contact the network administrator.
—continued—
Step Action
11 Click Accept.
ATTENTION
Increasing the Max Admin Weight at the Connection Parameters field will
enable the SNC to take an alternate route.
12 Click Provisioning and select the SNC tab for each node. View the
Provisioning SNC screen and check to ensure that there is a valid route
(sufficient bandwidth and match the service class constraint) going to the
destination node.
• If there is a route available, go to step 13.
• If a route is unavailable, a route must be established.
13 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, end this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-216
UNEQ/UNEQ-P
Category: Communication
Default Severity: Dynamic - Minor, Non service affecting for ports with
protected status, or Critical, service affecting for ports with unprotected status
The node reports Path Unequipped failures against provisioned paths that can
transport VC-4 circuits. The node can monitor paths non-intrusively; however,
it does not normally function as path-terminating equipment. The node can
terminate a VC-4 and access the overhead, but the VC4 managed object is
not exposed to the management interface.
The UNEQ-P reported to the management interface can be for a VC-3 path
that originates from the terminated VC-4 if that port is enabled for termination
or for an unterminated VC-4 path. For the VC-3 path that originates from the
terminated VC-4, the port will be a drop side port. For the unterminated VC-4
path, the port could be any port in the 5400 network that detects the UNEQ-P.
The UNEQ-P condition clears when the UNEQ-P defect clears or the CTP is
administratively locked (if CTP administrative control is supported).
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the port that displays the UNEQ/UNEQ-P warning.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-217
UPSR automatic switch
Category: Service report
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, and select
the alarm and note the port that displays the automatic switchover condition.
3 Expand the equipment tree until alarmed port is displayed and verify that no
equipment alarms exist.
— If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform
the TCP for the alarmed equipment.
— If an equipment alarm does not exist, go to step 4.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical line multiplexer in
accordance with that technology's guidelines. If the line in alarm is in the
interior 5400 Switch/CoreDirector Switch network, the upstream LTE or
MSTE is another 5400 Switch or CoreDirector Switch. If the line in alarm is a
network drop, the upstream technology is typically an Aggregator/MUX. The
far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser should be checked for the following:
• Port and LM (or equivalent if other technology) equipment failures or
Laser Bias Current TCAs should not be present. (Corrective action:
replace the port, LM, or equivalent.)
• The laser should be of the correct type (rate, wavelength, and reach), and
the provisioned optical rate (if applicable) should also be correct.
(Corrective action: replace port SFP/XFP/CFP or equivalent with correct
rate, wavelength, and reach. To check/correct provisioned rate of a
transmit 5400 Switch port, expand the Node Manager configuration tree,
select the Physical TP and Basic tabs, and ensure that the provisioned
optical rate is correct. Always lock the port before correcting and unlock
when completed.)
• The laser should not be locked. (Corrective action: unlock the port or
equivalent.)
• The output level of the laser (Node Manager PRTP Physical tab) should
be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform System Description. (Corrective action: clean the
transmit port or equivalent fiber connector, replace the port or equivalent,
and/or correct improper LBO if not a 5400 Switch technology.)
• The output should not have bit errors. If bit errors are present but all of
the other indicated laser tests are good, the transmit LM (or equivalent if
other technology) may be defective.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser or optical multiplexer tests bad,
repair in accordance with upstream technology guidelines, then go to
step 25.
• If the far end upstream LTE or MSTE laser and optical multiplexer tests
good, go to step 5.
—continued—
Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of interruption to service
Performance of this procedure may cause a traffic disruption. This
instruction is intended as a general guide only, has not been tested
for all possible applications or configurations, and may not be
complete or accurate for some situations.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to circuit packs
This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive
devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow
ESD procedures.
ATTENTION
Perform the following steps at the node.
5 Remove the alarmed port receive fiber. Insert the receive fiber into a test set
capable of reading bit errors and light level.
6 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 7.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 18.
7 Clean the receive fiber in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning &
Equipment Safety Practices and reinsert receive fiber into test set.
8 Determine if bit errors are reported by the test set.
• If bit errors are reported, go to step 9.
• If bit errors are not reported, go to step 22.
9 The received light level should be in accordance with SFP/XFP/CFP
Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical Platform System Description. Verify
that the received light level is within specification.
10 If the received light level is within specification, go to step 16.
• If the received light level is not within specification, go to step 11.
—continued—
Step Action
11 Determine if there one or more WDM line systems in the upstream path
(between the transmit LTE or MSTE checked in step 4 and the receive LTE or
MSTE in alarm).
• If no WDM line systems are in the upstream path, go to step 12.
• If there are any WDM line systems in the upstream path, go to step 14.
12 The output of the far end upstream LTE or MSTE was previously tested in
step 4. The low light level and resulting bit errors must be the result of a dirty
or defective fiber or connector between (but not including) the transmit LTE or
MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or MSTE. Isolate and clean/repair the
fiber or connector trouble in accordance with internal guidelines.
13 Determine if a defective or dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired in
step 12.
• If a defective/dirty fiber or connector was cleaned or repaired in step 12,
go to step 14.
• If no defective/dirty fibers or connectors were cleaned or repaired in step
12, go to step 27.
14 Check the laser and output of the closest upstream WDM system (using all of
the checks noted in step 4 of this procedure), and check/clean the transmit
fiber and connectors from the output of the WDM system to the input of the
alarmed 5400 Switch port in alarm. Correct any problems that are found.
15 Determine if any problems were isolated and corrected in step 14.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected in step 14, go to step 16.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected in step 14, go to step 27.
16 Isolate/repair or refer the BER problem across all WDM line systems between
the upstream transmit LTE or MSTE and the receive 5400 Switch LTE or
MSTE in alarm in accordance with internal guidelines. In addition to checking
for higher rate WDM system alarms and PM data, this isolation should include
checking any fibers and connectors on the input to the first WDM system and
fibers and connectors between multiple WDM systems, as well as output
lasers from one WDM system to another.
17 Determine if any problems were isolated and corrected in step 16.
• If any problems were isolated and corrected in step 16, go to step 18.
• If no problems were isolated and corrected in step 16, go to step 27.
18 Clean the port fiber connector in accordance with Ciena Standard Cleaning
and Equipment Safety Practices.
—continued—
Step Action
19 Check that the installed receive port is the correct type (rate, wavelength, and
reach) by verifying the part number.
20 Under the Go > Configuration menu, select the Physical TP and Basic
tabs.
21 View the Configured Rate box and ensure that the correct optical rate is
selected.
• If the correct optical rate is selected, go to step 22.
• If the correct optical rate is not selected, lock the port, select the correct
rate, and unlock the port.
22 Reconnect the fiber, then reinstall the port in accordance with the procedure
titled “Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP” in 5400 Packet-
Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
23 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, go to step 24.
24 Replace the port with a shelf spare. If required, refer to the procedure titled
“Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP” in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement. Then go to step 27.
25 Determine if the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is not within
specification defined in SFP/XFP/CFP Specifications in 5400 Packet-Optical
Platform System Description.
• If the test set is reporting bit errors or a light level is out of specification,
go to step 27.
• If the test set is not reporting bit errors or a light level is not out of
specification, go to step 26.
26 Reconnect the receive fiber, then reinstall the port. If required, refer to the
procedure titled “Removing, deleting or installing an SFP/XFP/CFP” in 5400
Packet-Optical Platform Fault Management - Module Replacement.
27 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-218
UPSR fail to switch
Category: Communication
The system raises a Fail to Switch condition when a UPSR protection feature
is unable to perform an automatic protection switch.
The system clears the Failure to Switch condition if the switch succeeds or if
the protection switch is no longer required because the underlying failure
cleared.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab.
3 Note and clear any UPSR faults: UPSR Automatic Switch To Protect, UPSR
default K byte defect, UPSR node Id mismatch or UPSR Protection Group
misconfiguration.
4 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-219
UPSR manual switch to protect
Category: Service report
The system clears the Manual Switch to Protect condition when the manual
state is cleared by management command or by a higher-priority automatic
switching command.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the NE that displays the UPSR manual switch to protect
warning.
3 Click Go > Protection > Line level > UPSR > Protection Unit tab and select
the protection unit identified in step 2.
4 Click the Release button in Administer/Status field.
5 If there are several switched protection units in the UPSR group, under the
Go > Protection > Line Level > UPSR > Group tab, select the UPSR group
from the list.
6 Click the Release button in Administer all PUs field.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-220
UPSR manual switch to working
Category: Service report
The system clears the Manual Switch to Protect condition when the manual
state is cleared by management command or by a higher-priority automatic
switching command or when the manual switch is released.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the NE that displays the UPSR manual switch to working
warning.
3 Click Go > Protection > Path level > UPSR > Protection Unit tab and select
the protection unit identified in step 2.
4 Click the Release button in Administer/Status field.
5 Click YES in the confirmation dialog.
6 If there are several switched protection units in the UPSR group, under the
Go > Protection > Path Level > UPSR > Group tab, select the UPSR group
from the list.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-221
UPSR force switch to protect
Category: Service report
The system clears the Force Switch to Protect condition when the manual
state is cleared by management command or by a higher-priority automatic
switching command.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab. Select the
alarm and note the NE that displays the UPSR force switch to protect alarm.
3 From the list under the Go > Protection > Path Level > UPSR > Groups tab,
select the protection unit identified in step 2.
4 Verify the state of the working path in the Administer/Status field; it should be
OKAY.
5 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
6 Click Yes in confirmation dialog.
—continued—
Step Action
7 If there are several locked protection units in the UPSR group, from the list
under the Go > Protection > Path Level > UPSR > Group tab, select the
UPSR group.
8 Click the Release button in Administer All PUs field.
9 Click Accept.
10 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-222
UPSR force switch to work
Category: Service report
The system clears the Force Switch to Work condition when the manual state
is cleared by management command or by a higher-priority automatic
switching command or when the force switch is released.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab. Select the
alarm and note the NE that displays the UPSR force switch to work alarm.
3 From the list under the Go > Protection > Path Level > UPSR > protection
Units tab, select the UPSR protection unit identified in step 2.
4 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
5 Click Yes in confirmation dialog.
6 If there are several locked protection units in the UPSR group, from the list
under the Go > Protection > Path Level > UPSR > Group tab, select the
UPSR group.
—continued—
Step Action
Procedure 2-223
UPSR lockout of protect
Category: Service report
The system clears the Lockout of Protect condition when the manual state is
cleared by management command.
1 From the field Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager
application and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events, select the Alarms tab, select the
alarm, and note the NE that displays the UPSR lockout of protect. alarm.
3 From the list under the Go > Protection > Path Level > UPSR > Protection Unit
tab, select the protection unit identified in step 2.
4 Click the Release button in Administer Status field.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Procedure 2-224
VLSR default k-bytes defect
Category: Communication
Condition Description:
The system raises the VLSR Default K Byte condition if the NE continues to
detect a default K bytes for 2.5 (±0.5) seconds.
1 From the Node Manager workstation, launch the Node Manager application
and log on to the desired node.
2 Click Go > Monitoring > Alarms & Events and select the Alarms tab.
3 Select the port that displays the VLSR default k-bytes defect warning, the
source name and additional information.
• If an equipment alarm exists, discontinue this procedure and perform the
TCP for the alarmed equipment.
—continued—
Step Action
4 Check the downstream far end LTE Receiver (in accordance with the
guidelines of the downstream LTE technology) to identify any Receiver
equipment failure alarms, Near End APS alarms, or incoming line facility
defect alarms.
• If no Receiver equipment failure alarms, or incoming line facility defect
alarms are present on the downstream LTE, go to the next step.
• If any Receiver equipment failure alarms, Near End APS alarms, or
incoming line facility defect alarms are present on the downstream LTE,
discontinue this procedure and clear the noted equipment or facility
defect alarm in accordance with the downstream technology guidelines.
5 Verify that the alarm cleared.
• If the alarm cleared, stop this procedure.
• If the alarm did not clear, contact the next level of support.
—end—
Service-affecting/non service-affecting
alarms 3-
Table 3-1 summarizes the software alarm behavior given factors such as the
port type, the existing traffic type, the alarm type, and whether the interface is
protected.
The first column of the table indicates the port type. The port type is either a
drop-side port or a line-side port (trunk). A Subnetwork Connection (SNC)
contains two drop-side interface ports; all of the intermediate ports of an SNC
are line-side ports. Cross connects only span two ports and, therefore, do not
contain line-side ports, only drop-side ports.
The second column of the table indicates the traffic type configured on the
interface. The traffic type can be a XCON, Permanent Subnetwork Connection
(P-SNC), SNC (or some combination), or no traffic. If multiple traffic types
exist on the interface port, the alarm SA/NSA status and severity reflects the
worst case status. For example, from the table a failed, unprotected line-side
port containing an SNC should be indicating a facility alarm as minor and non-
service-affecting. If that same port contained a P-SNC, it would indicate a
facility alarm as critical and service-affecting. If that port contained both a P-
SNC and SNC, it would indicate the facility failure as critical and service-
affecting. (In the worst case, the P-SNC could not reroute around the facility
failure.)
The event column either indicates Failed or Degraded. The term Failed means
an LOS, LOF, AIS-L, or a BER-SF has been detected. The term Degraded
means that a BER-SD (Signal Degrade) has been detected.
The last two columns indicate the resulting SA/NSA status and severity of the
alarm based upon the previously discussed parameters. This alarm indication
behavior affects only line facility alarms (LOS, LOF, AIS-L, BER-SF, and BER-
SD). It does not include any change of behavior for path alarms, cross connect
alarms, or SNC alarms.
Table 3-1
SA/NSA alarm behavior
Degraded SA Major
Degraded SA Major
Table 3-1
SA/NSA alarm behavior (continued)
Degraded SA Major
Degraded SA Major
From Table 3-1, there are four input parameters that determine the SA/NSA
status and alarm severity. Because the parameters can change after the
alarm posts, 5400 Switch Baseline Software updates alarm status and
severity to reflect the change of any of the input parameters. For example, if a
cross connect is on a port that is Failed but is being protected by another port,
the facility alarm is marked as NSA and major. If after the alarm posts, the port
can no longer be protected, the facility alarm is updated to indicate SA and
critical. If at that point, the alarm condition changes from Failed to Degraded,
the facility alarm status updates to indicate SA and major. If the port can be
protected again before the alarm condition clears, the alarm status should
return to NSA and major.
Release 4.4
Publication: 009-3288-543
Document status: Standard
Revision A
Document release date: April 2018
CONTACT CIENA
For additional information, office locations, and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena
web site at www.ciena.com